coral control cards - microsoft · coral control cards for cdrs 200 ipx 500,800,3000 and flexicom...

272
Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document Edition 4.5

Upload: others

Post on 22-Sep-2019

8 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

CoralControl Cards

forCDRS 200

IPx 500,800,3000 andFlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000

Installation Procedureand Hardware Reference

Manual

Document Edition 4.5

Page 2: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

© Copyright by TADIRAN TELECOM (TTL) L.P., 2006-2015. All rights reserved worldwide.

The Coral is Protected by U.S. Patents 6,594,255; 6,598,098; 6,608,895; 6,615,404

All trademarks contained herein are the property of their respective holders.

The information contained in this document is proprietary and is subject to all relevant copyright, patent and other laws protecting intellectual property, as well as any specific agreement protecting TADIRAN TELECOM (TTL) L.P.'s (herein referred to as the “Manufacturer”) rights in the aforesaid information. Neither this document nor the information contained herein may be published, reproduced or disclosed to third parties, in whole or in part, without the express, prior, written permission of the Manufacturer. In addition, any use of this document or the information contained herein for any purposes other than those for which it was disclosed is strictly forbidden.

The Manufacturer reserves the right, without prior notice or liability, to make changes in equipment design or specifications.

Information supplied by the Manufacturer is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed by the Manufacturer for the use thereof nor for the rights of third parties which may be affected in any way by the use thereof.

Any representation(s) in this document concerning performance of the Manufacturer's product(s) are for informational purposes only and are not warranties of future performance, either express or implied. The Manufacturer's standard limited warranty, stated in its sales contract or order confirmation form, is the only warranty offered by the Manufacturer in relation thereto.

This document may contain flaws, omissions or typesetting errors; no warranty is granted nor liability assumed in relation thereto unless specifically undertaken in the Manufacturer's sales contract or order confirmation. Information contained herein is periodically updated and changes will be incorporated into subsequent editions. If you have encountered an error, please notify the Manufacturer. All specifications are subject to change without prior notice.

Page 3: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document
Page 4: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Record of Changes

Edition No.

Issue Date Brief Description

4.5 Apr-21-2015 • New front/back cover with the new Tadiran logo• Page 1-12 corrected Table 1-3, WG• Page 1-15 added PUGW-2G• Corrections in pages: 1-17, 1-49, 1-50, 1-53, 1-56, 1-57, 2-

41, 6-1

4.4 July-2012 Aeonix 1.0

4.3 Nov-18-2009 LIU and IMC8 cards have been discontinued

4.2 June-14-2009 Changing page 3-6

4.1 May-11-2009 Changing Chapter 6 for SMDR configuration and MAP upgrade

4.0 Oct-2008

Page 5: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

TO

C

Table of Contents

1 Introduction

About this Manual

Document Description...................................................................................................... 1-3

Related Documentation.................................................................................................... 1-4

Special Symbols Used in this Manual .............................................................................. 1-6

About the IPx/FlexiCom Control Cards

System Description .......................................................................................................... 1-7

Card Description .............................................................................................................. 1-8

Card Compatibility .......................................................................................................... 1-10

About the Wave Gateway Control Cards

System Description ........................................................................................................ 1-15

Card Description ............................................................................................................ 1-16

Card Compatibility .......................................................................................................... 1-17

Safety Guidelines

General .......................................................................................................................... 1-19

Handling Procedures...................................................................................................... 1-19

Control Card Location in Coral System

Inserting a Coral Circuit Card......................................................................................... 1-21

Main Control Card Slot Assignments ............................................................................. 1-23

Connecting the LAN/RS-232 Cables to MAP/CLA/LIU/KB0 .......................................... 1-25

Coral IPx 500M .............................................................................................................. 1-27

Coral IPx 800M .............................................................................................................. 1-28

Coral IPx 3000M ............................................................................................................ 1-30

CDRS 200 (Software Version 14.67 or lower) ............................................................... 1-32

CDRS 200E.................................................................................................................... 1-34

Coral FlexiCom 200 (Software Version 14.67 or lower) ................................................. 1-35

Coral FlexiCom 300 (Software Version 14.67 or lower) ................................................. 1-37

Coral FlexiCom 400V (Software Version 14.67 or lower) .............................................. 1-38

Coral FlexiCom 400 ....................................................................................................... 1-39

Control Card Installation Manual 1

Page 6: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

TO

C

Connecting the LAN Cable (FlexiCom 300, 400, 400V)................................................. 1-40

Coral FlexiCom 5000 Main Cabinet ............................................................................... 1-41

Coral Wave Gateway (IPx) 500M................................................................................... 1-47

Coral Wave Gateway (IPx) 800M................................................................................... 1-48

Coral Wave Gateway (IPx) 3000M................................................................................. 1-49

Coral Wave Gateway (FlexiCom) 400............................................................................ 1-50

Coral Wave Gateway (FlexiCom) 5000 Main Cabinet ................................................... 1-51

2 Main Control Processor Cards

MCP-IPx2 Card

General Information ......................................................................................................... 2-1

Card Features .................................................................................................................. 2-6

Card Connectors ............................................................................................................ 2-13

Inserting the MCP-IPx2 Card into its Slot....................................................................... 2-16

Removing the MCP-IPx2 Card....................................................................................... 2-17

Daughterboard Configurations ....................................................................................... 2-18

Specifications - MCP-IPx2 ............................................................................................. 2-36

MEX-IP2 Card

General Description ....................................................................................................... 2-39

Front Panel Features ..................................................................................................... 2-43

Card Layout.................................................................................................................... 2-52

Inserting the MEX-IP2 Card into its Slot......................................................................... 2-56

Removing the MEX-IP2 Card......................................................................................... 2-57

Daughterboard Configurations ....................................................................................... 2-58

Specifications - MEX-IP2 ............................................................................................... 2-75

3 Expansion Memory Cards

DBM-2, DBM-4, and DBM-8 Module

Database Expansion Memory Card

General Description ......................................................................................................... 3-1

When a DBM Card is Required........................................................................................ 3-4

Installing or Removing the DMB Card.............................................................................. 3-5

Specifications - DBM........................................................................................................ 3-8

2 Control Card Installation Manual

Page 7: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

TO

C

DBX Module

General Information ......................................................................................................... 3-9

When a DBX Card is Required ...................................................................................... 3-11

Installing and Removing the DBX Card.......................................................................... 3-12

Testing the Lithium Battery ............................................................................................ 3-14

Specifications - DBX ...................................................................................................... 3-15

4 Flash Memory Cards IMC4(FMsl), IMC8, IMC16

Flash Memory Card

Introduction ...................................................................................................................... 4-1

General Information ......................................................................................................... 4-1

Flash Card Slot in the MCP-IPx and MCP-IPx2 Cards .................................................... 4-4

Flash Card Slot in the MEX-IP and MEX-IP2 Cards ........................................................ 4-6

Specifications - IMC ......................................................................................................... 4-8

Inserting and Removing the Flash Memory Card

Inserting and Removing the Flash Card........................................................................... 4-9

Saving to and Restoring from the Flash Card

Accessing the Database Flash Menu............................................................................. 4-13

Saving to the Flash Card................................................................................................ 4-14

Loading (Restoring) from the Flash Card....................................................................... 4-16

Displaying File Information............................................................................................. 4-18

Automatic Daily Backup ................................................................................................. 4-19

Erasing Flash Memory ................................................................................................... 4-20

5 Software Authorization Unit (SAU)

Software Authorization Unit (SAU)

Software Authorization Management ............................................................................... 5-1

6 Application Cards

MAP Card

General Description ......................................................................................................... 6-1

Physical Description......................................................................................................... 6-3

Control Card Installation Manual 3

Page 8: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

TO

C

MAP Functional Block Diagram ....................................................................................... 6-5

MAP Applications ............................................................................................................. 6-7

Installing the MAP Card ................................................................................................... 6-9

Setting the MAP Card DIP Switches .............................................................................. 6-11

Configuring the MAP Card ............................................................................................. 6-12

Upgrading the MAP Card ............................................................................................... 6-15

Removing the MAP Card ............................................................................................... 6-18

Network Connections (RJ-45) ........................................................................................ 6-19

Database Programming ................................................................................................. 6-20

MAP Maintenance (COM1 RS-232 Port) ....................................................................... 6-24

Specifications - MAP ...................................................................................................... 6-25

CLA Card

General Description ....................................................................................................... 6-27

Installing the CLA Card .................................................................................................. 6-32

Removing the CLA Card ................................................................................................ 6-35

Network Connections (RJ-45) ........................................................................................ 6-36

Database Programming ................................................................................................. 6-37

CLA Maintenance (COM1 RS-232 Port) ........................................................................ 6-38

Coral Link Adapter Application....................................................................................... 6-40

Specifications - CLA....................................................................................................... 6-42

7 LAN Interface Unit (LIU)

About the LIU

General Description ......................................................................................................... 7-1

Network Connections (RJ-45) .......................................................................................... 7-4

Installing the LIU Card

Hardware Installation ....................................................................................................... 7-7

Configuring the LIU Card

Connecting the Coral to the Workstation ....................................................................... 7-13

Configuring the LIU Card ............................................................................................... 7-14

Assigning an IP Address ................................................................................................ 7-15

Configuring the LIU Device ............................................................................................ 7-22

Activating the LIU Application ........................................................................................ 7-25

4 Control Card Installation Manual

Page 9: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

TO

C

Appendix: Assigning a Static IP Address ....................................................................... 7-26

Specifications - LIU

Control Card Installation Manual 5

Page 10: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

TO

C

6 Control Card Installation Manual

Page 11: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

LO

T

List of Tables

Table 1-1: Coral Version & Card Compatibility....................................................... 1-10

Table 1-2: Coral Control Cards & Baby Cards Compatibility................................. 1-11

Table 1-3: Coral Software Version Compatibility.................................................... 1-12

Table 1-4: Coral Systems & Control Cards Compatibility....................................... 1-13

Table 2: Coral Wave Gateway Systems & Control Cards Compatibility................. 1-17

Table 1-1: Control Card Slot Location in Coral Systems........................................ 1-23

Table 1-2: LAN/RS-232 Cables Routing Location in Coral Systems...................... 1-25

Table 1-3: Coral IPx 500M Card Slot Assignments ................................................ 1-27

Table 1-4: Coral IPx 800M Card Slot Assignments ................................................ 1-28

Table 1-5: Coral IPx 3000M Card Slot Assignments.............................................. 1-30

Table 1-6: CDRS 200 Card Slot Assignments ....................................................... 1-32

Table 1-7: CDRS 200E Card Slot Assignments ..................................................... 1-34

Table 1-8: Coral FlexiCom 200 Card Slot Assignments......................................... 1-35

Table 1-9: Coral FlexiCom 300 Card Slot Assignments......................................... 1-37

Table 1-10: Coral FlexiCom 400V Card Slot Assignments .................................... 1-38

Table 1-11: Coral FlexiCom 400 Card Slot Assignments....................................... 1-39

Table 1-12: Coral FlexiCom 5000 Main Cabinet Card Slot Assignments............... 1-41

Table 1-13: Coral Wave Gateway 500M Card Slot Assignments........................... 1-47

Table 1-14: Coral Wave Gateway 800M Card Slot Assignments........................... 1-48

Table 1-15: Coral Wave Gateway 3000M Card Slot Assignments......................... 1-49

Table 1-16: Coral Wave Gateway 400 Card Slot Assignments.............................. 1-50

Table 1-17: Coral Wave GW 5000 Main Cabinet Control Card Slots..................... 1-51

Table 1-18: Coral Wave GW 5000 Main Cabinet Peripheral Card Slots ............... 1-51

Table 2-1: MCP-IPx2 Control Card Front Panel Components ............................... 2-7

Table 2-2: MCP-IPx2 Control Card Top Panel Components.................................. 2-8

Table 2-3: MCP-IPx2 Control Card Layout Components ....................................... 2-8

Table 2-4: MCP-IPx2 Status Display Codes .......................................................... 2-10

Main Control Card Installation Manual 1

Page 12: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

LO

T

Table 2-5: MCP-IPx2 KB0 RS-232E Interface Pin Functions................................. 2-11

Table 2-6: MCP-IPx2 RJ-45 Interface Connection (LIU) ........................................ 2-12

Table 2-7: MCP-IPx2 Daughterboard Assembly Configurations on MCP-IPx2...... 2-18

Table 2-8: MEX-IP2 Control Card Functions.......................................................... 2-46

Table 2-9: MEX-IP2 Status Display Codes ............................................................ 2-48

Table 2-10: MEX-IP2 KB0 RS-232E Interface Pin Functions................................. 2-49

Table 2-11: MEX-IP2 RJ-45 Interface Connection ................................................. 2-50

Table 2-12: MEX-IP2 Card Layout Features .......................................................... 2-53

Table 2-13: MEX-IP2 Daughterboard Assembly Configurations ............................ 2-58

Table 3-1: DBM cards, Coral Systems & Control Cards Compatibility ................... 3-1

Table 3-2: DBM Card Assembly Kit........................................................................ 3-6

Table 3-3: DBX cards, Coral Systems & Control Cards Compatibility.................... 3-9

Table 3-4: Assembly Parts Used in DBX Assembly Kit .......................................... 3-13

Table 4-1: IMC Card Compatibility with Coral Version ........................................... 4-3

Table 4-2: IMC Card Compatibility with Control Cards........................................... 4-3

Table 4-3: IMC Card Compatibility with Coral Version and Control Card............... 4-3

Table 4-4: IMC Card Specifications........................................................................ 4-8

Table 6-1: Applications Supported by MAP Card................................................... 6-2

Table 6-2: MAP Card Front Panel .......................................................................... 6-3

Table 6-3: MAP Card Right Side ............................................................................ 6-3

Table 6-4: MAP Card Left Side .............................................................................. 6-4

Table 6-5: Assembly Parts Used in MAP Assembly Kit ......................................... 6-10

Table 6-6: Position of DIP Switches on MAP Card ................................................ 6-11

Table 6-7: SMDR Destination Configuration Possibilities ...................................... 6-14

Table 6-8: C/PUGW Software Components........................................................... 6-15

Table 6-9: MAP Interface Connections (DTE)........................................................ 6-19

Table 6-10: MAP Application Default Port assignment for IP Socket ..................... 6-23

Table 6-11: MAP RS-232 Pin Connections ............................................................ 6-24

Table 6-12: CLA Card Front Panel Components ................................................... 6-29

Table 6-13: CLA Interface Connections (DTE)....................................................... 6-36

Table 6-14: CLA RS-232 Pin Connections............................................................. 6-38

Table 6-15: CLA Troubleshooting Functions via COM1......................................... 6-39

Table 7-1: LIU cards, Coral Systems & Control Cards Compatibility ..................... 7-1

Table 7-2: LAN (LIU) Interface Connections (DTE)................................................ 7-4

2 Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 13: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

LO

T

Table 7-3: Assembly Parts Used in DBM Assembly Kit ......................................... 7-8

Table 7-4: Number of Bits per Host Part ................................................................ 7-20

Main Control Card Installation Manual 3

Page 14: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

LO

T

4 Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 15: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

LO

F

List of Figures

Figure 1-1: Main Control Processor Card Housed in IPx 500M cage............................................... 1-27

Figure 1-2: MAP/CLA/LIU Mounted onto IPx 500M (with RJ-45) Connection .................................. 1-27

Figure 1-3: Main Control Processor Card Housed in IPx 800M cage............................................... 1-28

Figure 1-4: MAP/CLA Mounted onto IPx 800M (with RJ-45) Connection......................................... 1-29

Figure 1-5: LIU Mounted onto IPx 800M (with RJ-45) Connection on Rear Panel of the Cage ....... 1-29

Figure 1-6: Main Control Processor Card Housed in IPx 3000M cage............................................. 1-30

Figure 1-7: MAP/CLA Mounted onto IPx 3000M (with RJ-45) Connection....................................... 1-31

Figure 1-8: LIU Mounted onto IPx 3000M (with RJ-45) Connection on Rear Panel of the Cage ..... 1-31

Figure 1-9: Main Control Processor Card Housed in CDRS 200 Cabinet ........................................ 1-32

Figure 1-10: ESD Strap Connection to CDRS 200 Cage ................................................................. 1-33

Figure 1-11: Main Control Processor Card Housed in CDRS 200E cage (tbd) ................................ 1-34

Figure 1-12: ESD Strap Connection to CDRS 200E Cage (tbd)....................................................... 1-34

Figure 1-13: Main Control Processor Card Housed in FlexiCom 200 Cabinet ................................. 1-35

Figure 1-14: ESD Strap Connection to Coral FlexiCom 200 Cage................................................... 1-35

Figure 1-15: MAP/CLA (with RJ-45) Connection - Option 2 in FlexiCom 200 Cabinet ..................... 1-36

Figure 1-16: MAP/CLA Connection Options in FlexiCom 200 Cabinet............................................. 1-36

Figure 1-17: Main Control Processor Card Housed in FlexiCom 300 Cabinet ................................. 1-37

Figure 1-18: Main Control Processor Card Housed in FlexiCom 400V Cabinet ............................... 1-38

Figure 1-19: Main Control Processor Card Housed in FlexiCom 400 Cabinet ................................. 1-39

Figure 1-20: MAP/CLA/LIU Mounted onto FlexiCom 300, 400V or 400 (with RJ-45) Connection.... 1-40

Figure 1-21: Main Control Processor Card Housed in FlexiCom 5032 Cabinet ............................... 1-42

Figure 1-22: Main Control Processor Card Housed in FlexiCom 5048 Cabinet ............................... 1-43

Figure 1-23: H624 Crossover Cable ................................................................................................. 1-44

Figure 1-24: MAP/CLA/LIU Card Mounted onto FlexiCom 5032 (via an LDF unit) .......................... 1-45

Figure 1-25: MAP/CLA/LIU Card Mounted onto FlexiCom 5048 (via an LDF unit) .......................... 1-45

Figure 1-26: Coral FlexiCom 5000 Connector for MAP/CLA/LIU ..................................................... 1-46

Figure 1-27: Main Control Processor Card Housed in Wave Gateway 500M Cage......................... 1-47

Figure 1-28: Main Control Processor Cards Housed in Wave Gateway 800M Cage ....................... 1-48

Figure 1-29: Main Control Processor Cards Housed in Wave Gateway 3000M Cage ..................... 1-49

Figure 1-30: Main Control Processor Card Housed in Wave Gateway 400 Cabinet ........................ 1-50

Figure 1-31: Main Control Processor Card Housed in Wave Gateway 5032 Cabinet ...................... 1-52

Figure 2-1: MCP-IPx2 Card - Right Side .......................................................................................... 2-2

Main Control Card Installation Manual 1

Page 16: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

LO

F

Figure 2-2: MCP-IPx2 Card - Left Side............................................................................................. 2-3

Figure 2-3: MCP-IPx2 Card Front Panel........................................................................................... 2-6

Figure 2-4: MCP-IPx2 KB0 Pin Assignment ..................................................................................... 2-11

Figure 2-5: MCP-IPx2 RJ-45 Interface Connector PIN Assignment (LIU) ........................................ 2-12

Figure 2-6: One DBM Card Assembled onto an MCP-IPx2 Card - Front View ................................ 2-19

Figure 2-7: Two DBM cards Assembled onto an MCP-IPx-2 - Front View ....................................... 2-20

Figure 2-8: Layout of DBM Card Assembled onto MCP-IPx2........................................................... 2-21

Figure 2-9: One DBX Card Assembled onto MCP-IPx2 Card - Front View ...................................... 2-22

Figure 2-10: Two DBX Cards Assembled onto MCP-IPx2 Card - Front View .................................. 2-23

Figure 2-11: Layout of DBX Card Assembled onto an MCP-IPx2 Card ........................................... 2-24

Figure 2-12: Layout of 2 DBX Card Assembled onto an MCP-IPx2 Card ........................................ 2-25

Figure 2-13: MCP-IPx2 Card with MAP - Front View........................................................................ 2-26

Figure 2-14: MCP-IPx2 with DBM and MAP - Front View ................................................................ 2-27

Figure 2-15: MCP-IPx2 with DBM and CLA - Front View ................................................................. 2-28

Figure 2-16: MCP-IPx2 with CLA - Front View ................................................................................. 2-29

Figure 2-17: MCP-IPx2 with DBX and CLA - Front View.................................................................. 2-30

Figure 2-18: MCP-IPx2 with DBX and MAP - Front View ................................................................. 2-31

Figure 2-19: Layout of DBM and MAP Card Assembled onto an MCP-IPx2 Card ........................... 2-32

Figure 2-20: MCP-IPx2 Card with CLA and DBM - Layout............................................................... 2-33

Figure 2-21: MCP-IPx2 Card with CLA and DBX - Layout ............................................................... 2-34

Figure 2-22: MCP-IPx2 Card with MAP and DBX - Layout............................................................... 2-35

Figure 2-23: MEX-IP2 Card .............................................................................................................. 2-40

Figure 2-24: MEX-IP2 Card Front Panel........................................................................................... 2-43

Figure 2-25: MEX-IP2 Front Panel with MAP Installed..................................................................... 2-44

Figure 2-26: MEX-IP2 Front Panel with CLA Installed...................................................................... 2-45

Figure 2-27: MEX-IP2 KB0 Pin Assignment ..................................................................................... 2-49

Figure 2-28: MEX-IP2 RJ-45 Interface Connector PIN Assignment ................................................. 2-50

Figure 2-29: LIU Port on IPx 800M Rear Panel ................................................................................ 2-51

Figure 2-30: LIU Port on IPx 3000M Rear Panel .............................................................................. 2-51

Figure 2-31: MEX-IP2 Card Layout .................................................................................................. 2-52

Figure 2-32: One DBM Card Assembled onto an MEX-IP2 Card - Top View................................... 2-59

Figure 2-33: Two DBM Cards Assembled onto an MEX-IP2 Card - Top View................................. 2-60

Figure 2-34: Layout of DBM Card Assembled onto MEX-IP2........................................................... 2-61

Figure 2-35: MEX-IP2 with CLA - Top View ..................................................................................... 2-62

Figure 2-36: One DBX Card Assembled onto the P1 Connector of the MEX-IP2 Card - Top View . 2-63

Figure 2-37: Two DBX Cards Assembled onto the P1 Connector of the MEX-IP2 Card - Top View 2-64

Figure 2-38: Layout of DBX Cards Assembled onto an MEX-IP2 Card............................................ 2-65

Figure 2-39: MEX-IP2 with MAP - Top View..................................................................................... 2-66

Figure 2-40: Attaching the MAP Card onto a MEX-IP2 Card............................................................ 2-67

Figure 2-41: MEX-IP2 with DBM and MAP - Top View..................................................................... 2-68

Figure 2-42: MEX-IP2 with DBM and CLA - Top View ..................................................................... 2-69

2 Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 17: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

LO

F

Figure 2-43: MEX-IP2 with DBX and CLA - Top View ...................................................................... 2-70

Figure 2-44: MEX-IP2 with DBX and MAP - Top View ..................................................................... 2-71

Figure 2-45: MEX-IP2 with MAP Card - Layout ................................................................................ 2-72

Figure 2-46: MEX-IP2 Card with CLA and DBM - Layout................................................................. 2-73

Figure 2-47: MEX-IP2 Card with CLA and DBX - Layout ................................................................. 2-74

Figure 3-1: DBM-2, DBM-4, and DBM-8 Card Layout ...................................................................... 3-2

Figure 3-2: DBM Card Lower Side.................................................................................................... 3-2

Figure 3-3: DBX Card Layout ........................................................................................................... 3-10

Figure 4-1: Flash Memory Card Installed into MCP-IPx and MCP-IPx2 Card - Left ......................... 4-4

Figure 4-2: Flash Memory Card Installed into MCP-IPx and MCP-IPx2 Card - Right....................... 4-4

Figure 4-3: IMC Card Installed in MCP-IPx or MCP-IPx2................................................................. 4-5

Figure 4-4: Flash Memory Card Installed into MEX-IP and MEX-IP2 Cards- Left side .................... 4-6

Figure 4-5: Flash Memory Card installed into MEX-IP and MEX-IP2 Cards - Right Side................. 4-6

Figure 4-6: IMC Card Installed in MEX-IP or MEX-IP2..................................................................... 4-7

Figure 5-1: Software Authorization Unit (SAU) Detail ....................................................................... 5-2

Figure 6-1: MAP Card Front Panel and Right Side........................................................................... 6-4

Figure 6-2: MAP Card Left Side........................................................................................................ 6-4

Figure 6-3: MAP Card Functional Block Diagram............................................................................. 6-6

Figure 6-4: MAP Card Process Flow Diagram.................................................................................. 6-6

Figure 6-5: INFO page...................................................................................................................... 6-12

Figure 6-6: IP Definitions Page......................................................................................................... 6-13

Figure 6-7: MAP Workstation Connection ........................................................................................ 6-16

Figure 6-8: MAP RJ-45 Crossover Cable ......................................................................................... 6-16

Figure 6-9: MAP Upgrade Status Page ............................................................................................ 6-17

Figure 6-10: CLA 486 Card............................................................................................................... 6-28

Figure 6-11: F-CLA 686 Card ........................................................................................................... 6-29

Figure 6-12: CLA 486 Card - Functional Block Diagram .................................................................. 6-31

Figure 6-13: F-CLA 686 Card - Functional Block Diagram ............................................................... 6-31

Figure 6-14: CoraLINK Application Telephony Server...................................................................... 6-41

Figure 7-1: LIU Card Layout ............................................................................................................. 7-2

Figure 7-2: LAN (LIU) RJ-45 Interface Connector PIN Assignment ................................................. 7-4

Figure 7-3: Coral FlexiCom 5000 Connector for LIU ........................................................................ 7-5

Figure 7-4: RJ-45 (LIU) Connector on Rear Panel of IPx 800M ....................................................... 7-6

Figure 7-5: RJ-45 (LIU) Connector on Rear Panel of IPx 3000M ..................................................... 7-6

Figure 7-6: LIU Card Assembled onto an MCP-IPx2 Card ............................................................... 7-10

Figure 7-7: LIU Card Assembled onto an MEX-IP2 Card ................................................................. 7-11

Figure 7-8: LIU Workstation Connection........................................................................................... 7-13

Figure 7-9: Cross-over Cable with RJ-45 Connectors ...................................................................... 7-14

Main Control Card Installation Manual 3

Page 18: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

LO

F

4 Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 19: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Main Control Card Installation Manual

Chapter

1

Introduction

1.1 About this Manual .................................................................1-3

1.2 About the IPx/FlexiCom Control Cards.................................1-7

1.3 About the Wave Gateway Control Cards ............................1-15

1.4 Safety Guidelines................................................................1-19

1.5 Control Card Location in Coral System ..............................1-21

Page 20: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document
Page 21: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

M

1.1

ain Control Card Installation M

About this Manual

Abou

t thi

s M

anua

l 1

.................................................................................. Document Description

The Coral IPx 500, 800, 3000; FlexiCom 200, 300, 400V, 400, 5000; and

CDRS 200, 200E Control Card Installation Manual is designed for field use by

personnel who install control cards in these systems.

This manual offers detailed information about these cards, including specifications,

internal hardware, interface circuit operation, and installation procedures. The

following table provides a detailed outline of each chapter.

Chapter Topic Description

Chapter 1 Introduction To learn about the manual, cards, safety guidelines, and card location in Coral systems

Chapter 2 Main Control Processor Cards

To learn about the MCP-IPx2, MEX-IP2, MCP-IPx, and MEX-IP cards including installation procedures

Chapter 3 Expansion Memory Cards

To learn about the DBM and DBX cards, including installation procedures

Chapter 4 Flash Memory Cards IMC4(FMsl), IMC8, IMC16

To learn about the IMC4, IMC8 and IMC16 cards, including installation procedures

Chapter 5 Software Authorization Unit (SAU)

To learn about the SAU (Software Authorization Unit)

Chapter 6 Application Cards To learn about the MAP and CLA cards, including installation procedures

Chapter 7 LAN Interface Unit (LIU)

To learn about the LIU card, including installation procedures

anual Introduction 1-3

Page 22: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Abou

t thi

s M

anua

l 1

.................................................................................. Related Documentation

For further information about Coral systems, database programming, IP devices, etc.,

not covered by this manual, consult the following documentation.

Item Subject Manual

Card Database Programming 1) PI - Program Interface and Database Reference Manual

2) CVA - CoralVIEW Administrator User Manual

3) CVD - CoralVIEW Designer Guide

Coral FlexiCom200, 300, 400, 5000

General description and specifications

Coral IPx and FlexiCom Product Description

Installation Procedures

- Coral FlexiCom 200 Base Unit,- Coral FlexiCom 200 Expansion Unit,

- Coral FlexiCom 300, 400, 5000,Installation and Hardware Reference Manual

Coral IPx500, 800, 3000

General description and specifications

Coral IPx and FlexiCom Product Description

Installation Procedures

- Coral IPx Office,- Coral IPx 500,- Coral IPx 800,- Coral IPx 3000,Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual

CDRS 200 Descriptions and Installation Procedure

-CDRS 200 Base Unit,-CDRX 200 Expansion Unit,Installation and Hardware Reference Manual

CDRS 200E Descriptions and Installation Procedure

- CDRS 200EInstallation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual

SVC (for Coral FlexiCom 300, 400V)

Installation Procedures

- Coral FlexiCom 300, 400, 5000,Installation and Hardware Reference Manual

HDC

(for Coral FlexiCom 400 and IPx 800)

Installation Procedures

- Coral IPx 800,- Coral FlexiCom 300, 400, 5000,Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual

1-4 Introduction Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 23: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Abou

t thi

s M

anua

l 1

4GC and PB-24

(for Coral FlexiCom 5000 and IPx 3000)

Installation Procedures

- Coral IPx 3000,- Coral FlexiCom 300, 400, 5000,Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual

Peripheral circuitry Descriptions and Installation Procedure

Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual

Shared service and auxiliary circuitry

Item Subject Manual

Main Control Card Installation Manual Introduction 1-5

Page 24: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Abou

t thi

s M

anua

l 1

.................................................................................. Special Symbols Used in this Manual

Indicates important information demanding special attention.

Tip:

Advice that makes it easier to follow the steps of a procedure.

There is a risk of danger to life or personal injury.

There is a risk of damage to Coral FlexiCom system.

NOTES: A page that is intentionally left blank. It may be used for the reader's notes.

1-6 Introduction Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 25: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

M

1.2

ain Control Card Installation M

About the IPx/FlexiCom Control Cards(IPx) 500, 800, 3000 and (FlexiCom) 200, 300, 400, 5000

Abou

t the

IPx/

Flex

iCom

Con

trol C

ards

(IPx

) 500

, 800

, 300

0 an

d (F

lexi

Com

) 200

, 300

, 400

, 500

01

.................................................................................. System Description

The active circuitry of the Coral system is contained on removable printed circuit

cards, nearly all of which may be used in any Coral system.

The active circuitry of the Coral system is divided into three major categories:

Peripheral circuitry - described in the Service and Peripheral Cards

Installation Manual. See Related Documentation, page 1-4.

Shared service and auxiliary circuitry - described in the Service and

Peripheral Cards Installation Manual. See Related Documentation, page 1-4.

Common control circuitry - described in this manual. The common control

circuitry provides the control mechanism for establishing audio and data

connections or calls between peripheral I/O ports in the system via the PCM

bus. Common control circuitry cards include the following:

Main control processor cards (MCP-IPx21, MEX-IP22, MCP-IPx, and

MEX-IP)

Expansion memory cards (DBM3 or DBX)

Flash memory cards (IMC4, IMC8, and IMC16)

Software Authorization Unit (SAU)

Application cards (CLA and MAP4)

LAN Interface Unit (LIU5)

1. MCP-IPx2 requires Coral Software Version 14 or higher2. MEX-IP2 requires Coral Software Version 14 or higher3. DBM requires Coral Software Version 15 or higher and MCP-IPx2/MEX-IP24. MAP requires Coral Software Version 11 or higher and

MCP-IPx2/MEX-IP2/MCP-IPx/MEX-IP5. LIU requires MCP-IPx2/MEX-IP2

anual Introduction 1-7

Page 26: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Abou

t the

IPx/

Flex

iCom

Con

trol C

ards

(IPx

) 500

, 800

, 300

0 an

d (F

lexi

Com

) 200

, 300

, 400

, 500

01

.................................................................................. Card Description

The following common control cards are included in the Coral IPx 500, 800, 3000,

CDRS 200, 200E and FlexiCom 200, 300, 400, and 5000 systems:

Main control processor cards, including the MCP-IPx2, MEX-IP-2, MCP-IPx,

and MEX-IP, are the “core” of common control in these systems. The main

control processor cards include memory management circuitry, local bus

interface and database memory (protected against power loss by a long-life

lithium standby battery), and provide a real-time clock and host the Software

Authorization Unit (SAU). The main processor receives status messages from

ports in the system and determines the appropriate response based on

programming entries contained in the system database. See Chapter 2, Main

Control Processor Cards.

The memory expansion cards (DBM and DBX) are optional cards that expand

the database memory space, which stores the system's configuration. It is likely

to be required for special applications. See Chapter 3, Expansion Memory

Cards.

The flash memory cards (IMC4, IMC8, and IMC16) provide memory space for

the generic feature system software. The generic feature software determines

the operation of telephony functions of the system. These cards use flash

memory technology to provide high-reliability, non-volatile storage for the

generic software and system database, combined with the capability of field

software upgrade. See Chapter 4, Flash Memory Cards

IMC4(FMsl), IMC8, IMC16.

The Software Authorization Unit (SAU) is used to define which applications

are authorized to be used by the customer. The SAU is identical for all cards.

See Chapter 5, Software Authorization Unit (SAU).

The optional CoraLINK card (CLA) is used for Composit and FlexCT CTI

(Computer Telephone Interface) applications interface. The CLA card includes

the application processor and Ethernet 10Base-T interface circuitry for the

CoraLINK computer-telephony integration (CTI) link. CoraLINK uses TCP/IP

protocol and complies with ECMA 179, ECMA 180, and ECMA 269 phase 3

standards. CoraLINK also supports the Novell TSAPI protocol, the Intel

Dialogic CT-connect, and IBM Callpath. The 10Base-T Ethernet interface

1-8 Introduction Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 27: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Abou

t the

IPx/

Flex

iCom

Con

trol C

ards

(IPx

) 500

, 800

, 300

0 an

d (F

lexi

Com

) 200

, 300

, 400

, 500

01

appears at a RJ-45 connector on the front panel of the CLA card. See

Chapter 6, Application Cards.

The optional Management Applications Platform (MAP) is a daughterboard on

the Coral Main Control Processor cards (MEX-IP2, MCP-IPx2, MEX-IP and

MCP-IPx) enabling the Coral system to run one or more external applications

on the same PC supported by the Coral system. The MAP allows up to 20

communications channels to the Coral Control Processors via IP connectivity

and requires Coral Software Version 15.5 or higher. The MAP also provides

CoraLINK (CLA) applications that requires Coral Software Version 11 or

higher.The MAP card includes the application processor and Ethernet 10/100Base-T

interface circuitry. The MAP attaches to an expansion connector on the

MCP-IPx2 and MEX-IP2 card in piggyback fashion. The 10/100Base-T

Ethernet interface appears at a RJ-45 connector on the front panel of the MAP

card.The MAP enables the applications (PI, CVD, SMDR, CFM, Wakeup, MCT,

Traffic and Charge) to interact with the Coral system via an RJ-45 LAN

connector instead of the KB0 RS-232 connector and other RMI RS-232 serial

ports. See Chapter 6, Application Cards.

The LAN Interface Unit (LIU) card enables the PI to interact with the Coral

system via an RJ-45 LAN connector instead of the KB0 RS-232 connector.

See Chapter 7, LAN Interface Unit (LIU).

Main Control Card Installation Manual Introduction 1-9

Page 28: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Abou

t the

IPx/

Flex

iCom

Con

trol C

ards

(IPx

) 500

, 800

, 300

0 an

d (F

lexi

Com

) 200

, 300

, 400

, 500

01

.................................................................................. Card Compatibility

Table 1-1 displays the control cards supported by each Coral software version.

Table 1-2 displays the daughterboards compatible with each main control card.

Table 1-3 displays the Coral Software Version Compatibility

Table 1-4 displays the control and the daughterboards compatible with each Coral

IPx/FlexiCom system.

Table 1-1 Coral Version & Card Compatibility Control Card Type Coral Software Version

11 14 15or

higher

WG

MEX-IP2 —

MCP-IPx2 —

MEX-IP — —

MCP-IPx — —

DBM2 (2MB) discontinued — —

DBM4 (4MB) — —

DBM8 (8MB) — —

DBX (1MB)

MAP

CLA —

LIU — —

IMC4 (FMsl) 1

1 IMC4 is for Coral FlexiCom 200 and CDRS 200 only.

IMC8

IMC16 2

2 IMC16 is required when the database exceeds 1.5MB.

— —

1-10 Introduction Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 29: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Abou

t the

IPx/

Flex

iCom

Con

trol C

ards

(IPx

) 500

, 800

, 300

0 an

d (F

lexi

Com

) 200

, 300

, 400

, 500

01

Table 1-2 Coral Control Cards & Baby Cards Compatibility

Baby Card Type MEX-IP MCP-IPx MEX-IP2 MCP-IPx2

DBM2 (2MB) discontinued — —

DBM4 (4MB) 1 — —

DBM8 (8MB) 1

1 DBM requires Coral Software Version 15 or higher.

— —

DBX (1MB)

MAP 2

2 MAP for CLA requires Coral Software Version 11 or higherMAP for CLA and CNCM requires Coral Software Version 15.5 or higher.

CLA

LIU — —

IMC4 (FMsl) 3

3 IMC4 is for Coral FlexiCom 200 and CDRS 200 only.

— —

IMC8 —

IMC16 4

4 IMC16 requires Coral Software Version 15 or higher and it is required when the database exceeds 1.5MB.

— —

Main Control Card Installation Manual Introduction 1-11

Page 30: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Abou

t the

IPx/

Flex

iCom

Con

trol C

ards

(IPx

) 500

, 800

, 300

0 an

d (F

lexi

Com

) 200

, 300

, 400

, 500

01

Table 1-3 Coral Software Version Compatibility

Coral System Type

Coral Software Version

11 14 15or

higher

WG

IPx Office — —

IPx 500 —

IPx 800 —

IPx 3000 —

CDRS 200 — —

CDRS 200E — —

FlexiCom 200 — —

FlexiCom 300 — —

FlexiCom 400V — —

FlexiCom 400

FlexiCom 5000

1-12 Introduction Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 31: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Abou

t the

IPx/

Flex

iCom

Con

trol C

ards

(IPx

) 500

, 800

, 300

0 an

d (F

lexi

Com

) 200

, 300

, 400

, 500

01

Table 1-4 Coral Systems & Control Cards Compatibility

Control Card Type

CDRS Coral FlexiCom Coral IPx

200

1

200

E

200

1

300

1

400

V 1

400

500

0

500

800

300

0

Off

ice

MCB Office — — — — — — — — — —

MEX-IP2 — — — — —

MCP-IPx2 — — — — — — —

MEX-IP — — — — —

MCP-IPx — — — — — — —

DBM2 (2MB) — — — —

DBM4 (4MB) 2 — — — —

DBM8 (8MB) 2 — — — —

DBX (1MB) —

MAP (CLA and CNCM)3 — — — — —

MAP (CLA only) —

CLA —

LIU 4 — — — —

IMC4 (FMsl) — — — — — — — — —

IMC8 — —

IMC16 5 — — — —

1 Coral FlexiCom 200, 300, 400V and CDRS 200 may be installed with Software Version 14.67 or lower.

2 DBM requires Coral Software Version 15 or higher.

3 MAP for CNCM requires Coral Software Version 15.5 or higher.

4 In Coral FlexiCom 200 and CDRS 200, 200E there is no hole at top panel for the LAN connector.

5 IMC16 requires Coral Software Version 15 or higher and it is required when the database exceeds 1.5MB

Main Control Card Installation Manual Introduction 1-13

Page 32: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

NOTES:

Page 33: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

M

1.3

ain Control Card Installation M

About the Wave Gateway Control Cards(IPx) 500, 800, 3000 and (FlexiCom) 400, 5000

Abou

t the

Wav

e G

atew

ay C

ontro

l Car

ds (I

Px) 5

00, 8

00, 3

000

and

(Fle

xiC

om) 4

00, 5

000

1

.................................................................................. System Description

The active circuitry of the Coral Wave Gateway system is contained on removable

printed circuit assemblies or cards, nearly all of which may be used in any Coral

system in the family.

The active circuitry of the Coral Wave Gateway system is divided into three major

categories:

Peripheral circuitry - described in the Service and Peripheral Cards

Installation Manual. See Related Documentation, page 1-4.

Shared service and auxiliary circuitry - described in the Service and

Peripheral Cards Installation Manual. See Related Documentation, page 1-4.

Common control circuitry - described in this manual. The common control

circuitry provides the control mechanism for establishing audio and data

connections or calls between peripheral I/O ports in the system via the PCM

bus. Common control circuitry cards include the following:

Main control processor cards (MCP-IPx2 and MEX-IP2)

Expansion memory cards (DBM or DBX)

Flash memory cards (IMC4, IMC8 and IMC16)

Application memory cards (MAP)

PUGW-2G1 or PUGW-2Gipx2, or PUGW and PUGWipx with MRC

1. PUGW-2G combines the PUGW and MRC32 cards in one card..2. PUGW-2Gipx combines the PUGWipx and MRC32 cards in one card.

anual Introduction 1-15

Page 34: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Abou

t the

Wav

e G

atew

ay C

ontro

l Car

ds (I

Px) 5

00, 8

00, 3

000

and

(Fle

xiC

om) 4

00, 5

000

1

.................................................................................. Card Description

The following common control cards are included in the Coral Wave Gateway

(IPx) 500, 800, 3000; (FlexiCom) 400, 5000; and (CDRS) 200E systems:

Main control processor cards, including the MCP-IPx2 and MEX-IP-2, are the

“core” of common control in these systems. The main control processor cards

include memory management circuitry, local bus interface, database memory

(protected against power loss by a long-life lithium standby battery), and

provide a real-time clock. The main processor receives status messages from

ports in the system and determines the appropriate response based on

programming entries contained in the system database. See Chapter 2, Main

Control Processor Cards.

The memory expansion cards (DBM and DBX) are optional cards that expand

the database memory space, which stores the system's configuration. It is likely

to be required for special applications. See Chapter 3, Expansion Memory

Cards.

The flash memory cards (IMC4, IMC8, and IMC16) provide memory space for

the generic feature system software. The generic feature software determines

the operation of telephony functions of the system. These cards use flash

memory technology to provide high-reliability, non-volatile storage for the

generic software and system database, combined with the capability of field

software upgrade. See Chapter 4, Flash Memory Cards

IMC4(FMsl), IMC8, IMC16.

The Management Applications Platform (MAP) card is used for the Wave

Gateway software application. It functions as the signaling interface to the

Aeonix, when a Coral IPx/FlexiCom system is converted to work as “Wave

Gateway” of the Aeonix. The MAP card includes the application processor and

Ethernet 10/100Base-T interface circuitry. The MAP attaches to an expansion

connector on the MCP-IPx2 and MEX-IP2 card in piggyback fashion. The

10/100Base-T Ethernet interface appears at a RJ-45 connector on the front

panel of the MAP card. See Chapter 6, Application Cards.

1-16 Introduction Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 35: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Abou

t the

Wav

e G

atew

ay C

ontro

l Car

ds (I

Px) 5

00, 8

00, 3

000

and

(Fle

xiC

om) 4

00, 5

000

1

.................................................................................. Card Compatibility

Table 2 displays the control and the daughterboards compatible with each Coral Wave

Gateway system.

Table 2 Coral Wave Gateway Systems & Control Cards Compatibility

Control Card Name

Coral Wave Gateway

Coral FlexiCom Coral IPx

400 5000 500 800 3000 Office

DBM4/8 (4/8MB)

DBX (1MB) —

IMC16

IMC4/8 — — — — — —

LIU * — — — — — —

CLA 1

1 Replace CLA and/or LIU with MAP

— — — — — —

MAP — 2

2 In the Coral IPx Office the MAP is embedded as a software only application on the MCB

MCB Office with MRC — — — — —

MCP-IPx 3

3 Replace MCP-IPx with MCP-IPx2

— — — — — —

MCP-IPx2 — — — — —

MEX-IP 4

4 Replace MEX-IP with MEX-IP2

— — — — — —

MEX-IP2 — —

4GC — — — —

HDC — — 5

5 In the Coral IPx 500 the HDC is embedded as a software only application on the MCB

— — 6

6 In the Coral IPx Office the HDC is embedded as a software only application on the MCB

PUGW-2G or PUGW with MRC

X — 7

7 In the Coral IPx Office the PUGW is embedded as a software only application on the MCB

PUGW-2Gipx or PUGW-2Gipx w/ MRC

— — X — —

Main Control Card Installation Manual Introduction 1-17

Page 36: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

NOTES:

Page 37: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

M

1.4

ain Control Card Installation M

Safety Guidelines

Safe

ty G

uide

lines

1

.................................................................................. General

It is the responsibility of the manufacturer’s representative to comply with all safety

requirements specific for each system. Installation of control cards must be carried out

by qualified personnel, only.

.................................................................................. Handling Procedures

This section describes how to safeguard the system against ElectroStatic Discharge

(ESD). Before handling any Coral system, it is necessary to verify that the ESD strap

is properly connected to the Coral system and worn, to prevent damage.

The following figures depict the ESD connection to the cage of each system:

Coral IPx 500M - Figure 1-1 on page 1-27

Coral IPx 800M - Figure 1-3 on page 1-28

Coral IPx 3000M - Figure 1-6 on page 1-30

CDRS 200 - Figure 1-10 on page 1-33

CDRS 200E - Figure 1-12 on page 1-34

Coral FlexiCom 200 - Figure 1-14 on page 1-35

Coral FlexiCom 300 - Figure 1-17 on page 1-37

All circuit cards, including Shared Service cards, Common Control cards, and

Peripheral cards, contain static-sensitive circuitry and may be damaged or destroyed by

ESD. Always wear the static dissipating wrist strap connected to the system cabinet,

unit, or card cage while handling circuit cards.

Hold circuit cards by their edges and avoid touching contact surfaces. Handle with care

and do not drop.

anual Introduction 1-19

Page 38: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Safe

ty G

uide

lines

1

Coral FlexiCom 400V - Figure 1-18 on page 1-38

Coral FlexiCom 400 - Figure 1-19 on page 1-39

Coral FlexiCom 5000 - Figure 1-21 on page 1-42 and Figure 1-22 on page 1-43

Coral Wave Gateway 500M - Figure 1-27 on page 1-47

Coral Wave Gateway 800M - Figure 1-28 on page 1-48

Coral Wave Gateway 3000M - Figure 1-29 on page 1-49

Coral Wave Gateway 400 - Figure 1-30 on page 1-50

Coral Wave Gateway 5000 - Figure 1-31 on page 1-52 and Figure 1-24 on page 1-45

1-20 Introduction Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 39: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

M

1.5

ain Control Card Installation M

Control Card Location in Coral System

Con

trol C

ard

Loca

tion

in C

oral

Sys

tem

1

This section describes the location of the control cards within the Coral IPx 500, 800,

3000; FlexiCom 200, 300, 400V, 400, 5000 and CDRS 200, 200E systems, and the

corresponding Coral Wave Gateway systems. For a detailed description of these cards,

see:

Chapter 2, Main Control Processor Cards

Chapter 3, Expansion Memory Cards

Chapter 4, Flash Memory Cards IMC4(FMsl), IMC8, IMC16

Chapter 5, Software Authorization Unit (SAU)

Chapter 6, Application Cards

Chapter 7, LAN Interface Unit (LIU)

.................................................................................. Inserting a Coral Circuit Card

Note that the Coral system cabinet is equipped with an anti-static wrist strap at the top,

above the card cage. This wrist strap is worn while inserting, removing, or handling

any card in the system. Each card is shipped in an anti-static plastic bag. Cards must

be kept in this bag whenever they are not handled. See Safety Guidelines, page 1-19.

1 Connect the ESD wrist strap connector to the cage and put on the strap.

2 Verify that the power supply to the cage or cabinet in which the control card is

to be inserted is turned OFF.

NEVER place a control card in any slot other than a control card slot. Never place a

control card in a peripheral slot or a shared service slot. Irreparable damage may occur

if a card is placed in an incorrect slot with power applied.

anual Introduction 1-21

Page 40: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

trol C

ard

Loca

tion

in C

oral

Sys

tem

1

3 To insert a circuit card into a card slot, grasp the card with both hands, fingers

on the edge of the card near the front side, and thumbs against the ejectors at

the top and bottom of the front panel.

4 Verify that the card is oriented correctly, with the DIP switches on the front

panel near the top of card.

5 Align the edges of the circuit card with the card edge guides in the card cage,

and gently slide the card straight into the card slot.

6 A slight resistance will be felt as the multi-pin connectors on the circuit card

meet, mating connectors on the backplane, and engage. Push against the

ejectors until the front panel of the card is flush with the front frame of the

card cage.

Inserting or removing a control card when power is applied could damage the card.

Before removing or inserting the control card, verify that the power supply switch is

turned OFF.

Do not force the circuit card into the slot. If more than slight resistance is encountered,

remove the circuit card and examine the connectors for bent pins or interfering debris.

1-22 Introduction Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 41: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

trol C

ard

Loca

tion

in C

oral

Sys

tem

1

.................................................................................. Main Control Card Slot Assignments

This section describes the position of the main control cards in the various systems.

The main control card is always positioned in the main cabinet shelf or cage as

described in Figure 1-1 on page 1-27 through Figure 1-31 on page 1-52.

The Coral system is equipped with a main control processor card (MEX-IP2,

MCP-IPx2, MEX-IP or MCP-IPx). The main control processor card provides control

functions such as described in Chapter 2, Main Control Processor Cards.

Control cards do not provide an interface to external devices, such as peripheral cards.

Control cards are installed in specific card slots. The slots listed in the following tables

are set aside exclusively for main control processor cards.e

Table 1-1 Control Card Slot Location in Coral Systems

System Control Card Slots

Coral CDRS 200 base unit Figure 1-9 on page 1-32

Coral CDRS 200E main unit Figure 1-1 on page 1-27

Coral FlexiCom 200 base unit Figure 1-13 on page 1-35

Coral FlexiCom 300 Figure 1-17 on page 1-37

Coral FlexiCom 400 Figure 1-19 on page 1-39

Coral FlexiCom 400V Figure 1-18 on page 1-38

Coral FlexiCom 5032 Main Cabinet Figure 1-21 on page 1-42

Coral FlexiCom 5048 Main Cabinet Figure 1-22 on page 1-43

Coral I Figure 1-17 on page 1-37

Coral II Figure 1-19 on page 1-39

Coral III/4GC 3 Shelf Figure 1-21 on page 1-42

Coral III/4GC 4 Shelf Figure 1-22 on page 1-43

Coral IPx 500M Figure 1-1 on page 1-27

Coral IPx 800M Figure 1-3 on page 1-28

Coral IPx 3000M Figure 1-6 on page 1-30

Coral I-S Figure 1-17 on page 1-37

Main Control Card Installation Manual Introduction 1-23

Page 42: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

trol C

ard

Loca

tion

in C

oral

Sys

tem

1

Coral SL base unit Figure 1-13 on page 1-35

Coral SL CSLX Figure 1-14 on page 1-35

Coral Wave Gateway (FlexiCom) 400 Figure 1-30 on page 1-50

Coral Wave Gateway (FlexiCom) 5032 Main Cabinet Figure 1-31 on page 1-52

Coral Wave Gateway (FlexiCom) 5048 Main Cabinet Figure 1-24 on page 1-45

Coral Wave Gateway (IPx) 500M Figure 1-27 on page 1-47

Coral Wave Gateway (IPx) 800M Figure 1-28 on page 1-48

Coral Wave Gateway (IPx) 3000M Figure 1-29 on page 1-49

System Control Card Slots

1-24 Introduction Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 43: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

trol C

ard

Loca

tion

in C

oral

Sys

tem

1

.................................................................................. Connecting the LAN/RS-232 Cables to MAP/CLA/LIU/KB0

This section describes the routing of LAN/RS-232 cables from the main control cards

(MCP-IPx2/MEX-IP2/MCP-IPx/MEX-IP/MAP/CLA/LIU) in the various systems.

LAN/RS-232 cables are routed in specific slots or holes. See Table 1-2.

The connection is made from an RJ-45 or D-type 9-pin connector on the front panel

of a control card via a cable that is routed to external equipment.

Table 1-2 LAN/RS-232 Cables Routing Location in Coral Systems

System Routing Cables to the Control Cards

Coral CDRS 200 base unit Refer to the CDRS 200 Base Unit Installation and Hardware Reference Manual

Coral CDRS 200E main unit Refer to the CDRS 200E Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual

Coral FlexiCom 200 base unit Connecting the LAN cable in FlexiCom 200 Cabinet:, page 1-36

Coral FlexiCom 300 Figure 1-20 on page 1-40

Coral FlexiCom 400 Figure 1-20 on page 1-40

Coral FlexiCom 400V Figure 1-20 on page 1-40

Coral FlexiCom 5032 Main Cabinet Connecting the LAN cable:, page 1-44

Coral FlexiCom 5048 Main Cabinet Connecting the LAN cable:, page 1-44

Coral I Figure 1-20 on page 1-40

Coral II Figure 1-20 on page 1-40

Coral III/4GC 3 Shelf Connecting the LAN cable:, page 1-44

Coral III/4GC 4 Shelf Connecting the LAN cable:, page 1-44

Coral III/SVC Connecting the LAN cable:, page 1-44

Main Control Card Installation Manual Introduction 1-25

Page 44: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

trol C

ard

Loca

tion

in C

oral

Sys

tem

1

Coral IPx 500M Figure 1-2 on page 1-27

Coral IPx 800M Figure 1-4 on page 1-29, Figure 1-5 on page 1-29

Coral IPx 3000M Figure 1-7 on page 1-31, Figure 1-8 on page 1-31

Coral I-S Figure 1-20 on page 1-40

Coral SL base unit Connecting the LAN cable in FlexiCom 200 Cabinet:, page 1-36

Coral Wave Gateway (FlexiCom) 400 Figure 1-20 on page 1-40

Coral Wave Gateway (FlexiCom) 5032 Main Cabinet Connecting the LAN cable:, page 1-44

Coral Wave Gateway (FlexiCom) 5048 Main Cabinet Connecting the LAN cable:, page 1-44

Coral Wave Gateway (IPx) 500M Figure 1-2 on page 1-27

Coral Wave Gateway (IPx) 800M Figure 1-4 on page 1-29,

Coral Wave Gateway (IPx) 3000M Figure 1-7 on page 1-31

System Routing Cables to the Control Cards

1-26 Introduction Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 45: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

trol C

ard

Loca

tion

in C

oral

Sys

tem

1

.................................................................................. Coral IPx 500M

The Coral IPx 500M includes one control card slot marked MCP and eight universal

I/O card slots marked 1 through 8. Table 1-3 lists the card types that can be inserted

into each card slot in the Coral IPx 500M cage. Figure 1-1 displays the location of the

MCP-IPx/2 card. Figure 1-2 displays the location of the MAP card.

Table 1-3 Coral IPx 500M Card Slot Assignments

Figure 1-1 Main Control Processor Card Housed in IPx 500M cage

Figure 1-2 MAP/CLA/LIU Mounted onto IPx 500M (with RJ-45) Connection

Type Card Slot Possible Card Types:

Common Control MCP MCP-IPx2 or MCP-IPx

Peripheral I/O Slots 1-8 Peripheral interface cards

16 27 38 45

Pow

er S

upply

MCP-IPx2 /MCP-IPxStatic Wrist Strap

UNIVERSAL I/O SLOTS

RJ-45 Ethernet Cable

MAP

MAP

MCP-IPx2

Main Control Card Installation Manual Introduction 1-27

Page 46: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

trol C

ard

Loca

tion

in C

oral

Sys

tem

1

.................................................................................. Coral IPx 800M

The Coral IPx 800M includes two control card slots marked CONTROL CARDS,

eight universal card slots marked 1 through 8, and one shared service card slot marked

9. Table 1-4 lists the card types that can be inserted into each card slot in the Coral

IPx 800M cage. Figure 1-1 displays the location of the MEX-IP/2 card. Figure 1-2

displays the location of the MAP card.

Table 1-4 Coral IPx 800M Card Slot Assignments

Figure 1-3 Main Control Processor Card Housed in IPx 800M cage

Type Card Slot Possible Card Types

Common Control

CONTROL CARDS (right slot) MEX-IP2, MEX-IP

CONTROL CARDS (left slot) HDC Card

Universal I/O Slots

1-8Any peripheral interface card or any shared service card

Shared service 9 Shared service cards

HD

C

Pow

er S

upply

Static Wrist Strap

Sha

red

Serv

ice

UNIVERSAL I/O SLOTS

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

ME

X-IP

2 / M

EX

-IP

1-28 Introduction Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 47: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

trol C

ard

Loca

tion

in C

oral

Sys

tem

1

Figure 1-4 MAP/CLA Mounted onto IPx 800M (with RJ-45) Connection

Figure 1-5 LIU Mounted onto IPx 800M (with RJ-45) Connection on Rear Panel of the Cage

RJ-45Ethernet Cable

LIU(RJ-45 LAN)

rear panelport

Main Control Card Installation Manual Introduction 1-29

Page 48: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

trol C

ard

Loca

tion

in C

oral

Sys

tem

1

.................................................................................. Coral IPx 3000M

The Coral IPx 3000M includes three control card slots. Two of the control card slots

are marked CONTROL CARDS. The second slot houses the 4GC card. The third slot

houses the PB-24 card. The slots marked 1 through 8 house eight universal I/O card

slots. Table 1-5 lists the card types that can be inserted into each card slot in the Coral

IPx 3000M cage.

Table 1-5 Coral IPx 3000M Card Slot Assignments

Figure 1-6 Main Control Processor Card Housed in IPx 3000M cage

Type Card Slot Possible Card Types

Common Control

CONTROL CARDS (right slot) MEX-IP2, MEX-IP

CONTROL CARDS (left slot) 4GC Card

PB-24 PB-24 Card

Universal I/O Slots

1-8 Peripheral Interface Cards

ME

X-IP

2 /

ME

X-IP

4GC

Pow

er S

upp

ly

PB

-24

UNIVERSAL I/O SLOTS

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Static Wrist Strap

1-30 Introduction Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 49: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

trol C

ard

Loca

tion

in C

oral

Sys

tem

1

Figure 1-7 MAP/CLA Mounted onto IPx 3000M (with RJ-45) Connection

Figure 1-8 LIU Mounted onto IPx 3000M (with RJ-45) Connection on Rear Panel of the Cage

RJ-45Ethernet Cable

LIU(RJ-45 LAN)

rear panelport

Main Control Card Installation Manual Introduction 1-31

Page 50: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

trol C

ard

Loca

tion

in C

oral

Sys

tem

1

.................................................................................. CDRS 200 (Software Version 14.67 or lower)

The CDRS 200 includes one control card slot marked MCPsl and five I/O card slots

marked slot 1 through 5. Table 1-6 lists the control, shared service, and peripheral

interface card types that can be inserted into each card slot in the CDRS 200 cabinet.

Figure 1-9 and Figure 1-10 display the location of the MCP-IPx2 card. Figure 1-20

displays the location of the MAP card.

Table 1-6 CDRS 200 Card Slot Assignments

Figure 1-9 Main Control Processor Card Housed in CDRS 200 Cabinet

Type Card Slot Possible Card Types

Shared Service CNSsl CNSsl (Conference card)

Common Control MCPsl MCP-IPx2

Peripheral I/O Slots 1-5 Peripheral Interface Cards

ON

OFF

KB0

DC/DCpowermodule Power

Supply(APSsl)

MCP-IPx2

DC OUTPUT I/O SLOTS

IMC

4 (F

Msl

)

DB

X

CLA

CN

Ssl

1-32 Introduction Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 51: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

trol C

ard

Loca

tion

in C

oral

Sys

tem

1

Figure 1-10 ESD Strap Connection to CDRS 200 Cage

Ground Cable

Ground Nut

Static Wrist Strap

Main Control Card Installation Manual Introduction 1-33

Page 52: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

trol C

ard

Loca

tion

in C

oral

Sys

tem

1

.................................................................................. CDRS 200E

The CDRS 200E includes one control card slot marked MCP and eight universal I/O

card slots marked 1 through 8. Table 1-7 lists the card types that can be inserted into

each card slot in the CDRS 200E cage. Figure 1-11 displays the location of the

MCP-IPx2 card.

Table 1-7 CDRS 200E Card Slot Assignments

Figure 1-11 Main Control Processor Card Housed in CDRS 200E cage (tbd)

Figure 1-12 ESD Strap Connection to CDRS 200E Cage (tbd)

Type Card Slot Possible Card Types:

Common Control MCP MCP-IPx2

Peripheral I/O Slots 1-8 Peripheral interface cards

1-34 Introduction Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 53: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

trol C

ard

Loca

tion

in C

oral

Sys

tem

1

.................................................................................. Coral FlexiCom 200 (Software Version 14.67 or lower)

The Coral FlexiCom 200 includes one control card slot marked MCPsl and five I/O

card slots marked slot 1 through 5. Table 1-8 lists the control, shared service, and

peripheral interface card types that can be inserted into each card slot in the Coral

FlexiCom 200 cabinet.

Table 1-8 Coral FlexiCom 200 Card Slot Assignments

Figure 1-13 Main Control Processor Card Housed in FlexiCom 200 Cabinet

Figure 1-14 ESD Strap Connection to Coral FlexiCom 200 Cage

Type Card Slot Possible Card Types

Shared Service CNSsl CNSsl (Conference card)

Common Control MCPsl MCP-IPx2 or MCP-IPx

Peripheral I/O Slots 1-5 Peripheral Interface Cards

ON

OFF

KB0

BackupBattery

(BATTsl)

PowerSupply(APSsl)

MCP-IPx2

DC OUTPUT I/O SLOTS

Main Processor CardMCP-IPx2 or MCP-IPx

with optionalDBX, MAP or CLA

IMC

4 (

FM

sl)

DB

X

CLA

CN

Ssl

Ground Cable

GroundNut

Static Wrist Strap

Main Control Card Installation Manual Introduction 1-35

Page 54: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

trol C

ard

Loca

tion

in C

oral

Sys

tem

1

Connecting the LAN cable in FlexiCom 200 Cabinet:

The Coral FlexiCom 200 allows two options for connecting the LAN cable:

Option 1 (NOT USED) This option was used for the discontinued CLA-386 card, with a BNC connection.

Option 2 The RJ-45 connector of the LAN cable is connected at the front panel of the MAP/CLA card to the RJ-45 adapter. The connection to the computer network is performed in this option through a hole at the top of the Coral FlexiCom 200 cabinet (see “CLA option 2” in Figure 1-15 and Figure 1-16).

Figure 1-15 MAP/CLA (with RJ-45) Connection - Option 2 in FlexiCom 200 Cabinet

Figure 1-16 MAP/CLA Connection Options in FlexiCom 200 Cabinet

RJ-45 Cable

Base Unit Top

MCP-IPx

MAP/CLA

Knok-Out HoleOption 2

CLA(OPTION 2)

VAC

KNOCK-OUT HOLESCLA

(OPTION 1)

MUSICPAGE1 2 3 4

RELAYSCONTACTS

KB1TERMINAL

1 2EXPANSION UNIT

CONNECTOR

1 2 3 4 5

1-36 Introduction Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 55: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

trol C

ard

Loca

tion

in C

oral

Sys

tem

1

.................................................................................. Coral FlexiCom 300 (Software Version 14.67 or lower)

The Coral FlexiCom 300 houses four control card slots marked A through D and ten

universal I/O card slots marked slot 1 through 10.

Table 1-9 lists the control, shared service, and peripheral interface card types that can

be inserted into each card slot in the Coral FlexiCom 300 cabinet.

For information on how to connect the LAN and RS-232 cables to the MAP, CLA,

LIU, or KB0 cards, see Connecting the LAN Cable (FlexiCom 300, 400, 400V), page 1-40.

Table 1-9 Coral FlexiCom 300 Card Slot Assignments

Figure 1-17 Main Control Processor Card Housed in FlexiCom 300 Cabinet

Type Card Slot Possible Card Types

Common Control

A None - Not Used

B-C MEX-IP2 or MEX-IP

D SVC or SVC-24

Universal I/O Slots 1-10Any Shared Service Card, or Any Peripheral Interface Card

A

PO

WE

R S

UP

PLY

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Per

ipher

al S

erv

ice C

ard

- S

VC

or

SV

C-2

4

UNIVERSAL I/O SLOTS

DCB

1 2

RESET

MEX-IP2

LAN

SAU

KB0

Main Processor CardMEX-IP2 or MEX-IP

with optionalDBX, MAP or CLA

Static Wrist Strap

Main Control Card Installation Manual Introduction 1-37

Page 56: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

trol C

ard

Loca

tion

in C

oral

Sys

tem

1

.................................................................................. Coral FlexiCom 400V (Software Version 14.67 or lower)

The Coral FlexiCom 400V contain 4 control card slots marked A through D, and 16

Universal I/O card slots marked slot 1 through 16.

Table 1-10 lists the Control, Shared Service and Peripheral Interface card types which

may be inserted into each card slot in the Coral FlexiCom 400V cabinet.

For information on how to connect the LAN and RS-232 cables to the MAP, CLA,

LIU, or KB0 cards, see Connecting the LAN Cable (FlexiCom 300, 400, 400V), page 1-40.

Table 1-10 Coral FlexiCom 400V Card Slot Assignments

Figure 1-18 Main Control Processor Card Housed in FlexiCom 400V Cabinet

Type Card Slot

Possible Card Types

Common Control

A None - Not Used

B-C MEX-IP2 or MEX-IP

D SVC-24

Universal I/O Slots

1-16Any Shared Service Card, or Any Peripheral Interface Card

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101 11 12 13 14 15 16

RIN

GE

R P

OW

ER

SU

PP

LY (

RP

S)

PO

WE

R S

UP

PLY

(P

PS

or A

PS

-2)

SV

C-2

4

UNIVERSAL I/O SLOTS

C DBA

Main Processor CardMEX-IP2 or MEX-IP

with optionalDBX, MAP or CLA

Static Wrist Strap

1-38 Introduction Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 57: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

trol C

ard

Loca

tion

in C

oral

Sys

tem

1

.................................................................................. Coral FlexiCom 400

The Coral FlexiCom 400 contain 4 control card slots marked A through D, and 16

Universal I/O card slots marked slot 1 through 16.

Table 1-11 lists the Control, Shared Service and Peripheral Interface card types which

may be inserted into each card slot in the Coral FlexiCom 400 cabinet.

For information on how to connect the LAN and RS-232 cables to the MAP, CLA,

LIU, or KB0 cards, see Connecting the LAN Cable (FlexiCom 300, 400, 400V), page 1-40.

Table 1-11 Coral FlexiCom 400 Card Slot Assignments

Figure 1-19 Main Control Processor Card Housed in FlexiCom 400 Cabinet

Type Card Slot Possible Card Types

Common Control

A None - Not Used

B-C MEX-IP2 or MEX-IP

D HDC

Universal I/O Slots

1-16Any Shared Service Card, or Any Peripheral Interface Card

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101 11 12 13 14 15 16

RIN

GE

R P

OW

ER

SU

PP

LY (

RP

S)

PO

WE

R S

UP

PLY

(P

PS

or

AP

S-2

)

HD

C

UNIVERSAL I/O SLOTS

C DBA

Main Processor CardMEX-IP2 or MEX-IP

with optionalDBX, DBM, CLA or MAP

Static Wrist Strap

Main Control Card Installation Manual Introduction 1-39

Page 58: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

trol C

ard

Loca

tion

in C

oral

Sys

tem

1

.................................................................................. Connecting the LAN Cable (FlexiCom 300, 400, 400V)

Cable LAN connections in the Coral FlexiCom 300, 400, 400V to MAP, CLA, or LIU

cards are established by a LAN cable routed from the RJ-45 connector on the front

panel of the MEX-IP2 control card via the hole in one of the side panels of the cabinet.

See Figure 1-20.

Figure 1-20 MAP/CLA/LIU Mounted onto FlexiCom 300, 400V or 400 (with RJ-45) Connection

RJ-45 Ethernet Cable

1-40 Introduction Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 59: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

trol C

ard

Loca

tion

in C

oral

Sys

tem

1

.................................................................................. Coral FlexiCom 5000 Main Cabinet

General

The Coral FlexiCom 5000 system is housed in one or more, free-standing, floor

mounted cabinet(s). Each system consists of one main cabinet, which contains the

Common Control Shelf (single or duplicated) and Peripheral Shelves, and one or more

optional Expansion cabinets. The Expansion cabinets contain only additional

peripheral shelves.

Coral FlexiCom 5000 Main cabinets are equipped with either 32 or 48 peripheral card

slots. One control shelf and two or three peripheral shelves, respectively. The Coral

FlexiCom 5032 main cabinet is built into a 3-shelf cabinet, illustrated in Figure 1-21.

Figure 1-18 displays the location of the MAP card. The Coral FlexiCom 5048 main

cabinet is built into a 4-shelf cabinet, illustrated in Figure 1-22.

The card section of the Common Control Shelf extends only half way across the card

cage, and contains seven card slots, marked A through G.

Main cabinet issues for Duplicated Common Control systems are equipped with a

second motherboard attached to the card cage, which is used to house the Duplicated

Common Control cards.

Table 1-12 lists the Control card types which may be inserted into each card slot in the

Common Control Shelf of the Coral FlexiCom 5000 main cabinet.

Table 1-12 Coral FlexiCom 5000 Main Cabinet Card Slot Assignments

Type Card Slot

Possible Card Types

Common Control

A 4GC

B-C MEX-IP2 or MEX-IP

None D-G None - Not Used

Main Control Card Installation Manual Introduction 1-41

Page 60: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

trol C

ard

Loca

tion

in C

oral

Sys

tem

1

Figure 1-21 Main Control Processor Card Housed in FlexiCom 5032 Cabinet

CPS 4GC CPS 4GC

CO

NT

RO

L P

OW

ER

SU

PP

LY

QU

AD

GR

OU

P C

ON

TR

OLL

ER

CO

NT

RO

L P

OW

ER

SU

PP

LY

QU

AD

GR

OU

P C

ON

TR

OLL

ER

CO

MM

ON

CO

NT

RO

L S

HE

LF

LO

WE

R P

ER

IPH

ER

AL

SH

EL

FU

PP

ER

P

ER

IPH

ER

AL

SH

EL

F

A B C D E F GA B C D E F G

COMMON CONTROL DUPLICATED COMMON CONTROL

Static Wrist Strap

Main Processor CardMEX-IP2 or MEX-IP

with optional DBX, DBM, CLA or MAP

ME

X-I

P2

/ M

EX

-IP

ME

X-I

P2

/ M

EX

-IP

1-42 Introduction Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 61: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

trol C

ard

Loca

tion

in C

oral

Sys

tem

1

Figure 1-22 Main Control Processor Card Housed in FlexiCom 5048 Cabinet

CPS 4GC CPS 4GC

CO

NT

RO

L P

OW

ER

SU

PP

LY

QU

AD

GR

OU

P C

ON

TR

OL

LER

CO

NT

RO

L P

OW

ER

SU

PP

LY

QU

AD

GR

OU

P C

ON

TR

OL

LER

ME

X-I

P2

/ ME

X-I

P

CO

MM

ON

CO

NT

RO

L S

HE

LF

BO

TT

OM

PE

RIP

HE

RA

L S

HE

LF

MID

DL

E P

ER

IPH

ER

AL

SH

EL

FT

OP

PE

RIP

HE

RA

L S

HE

LF

A B C D E F GA B C D E F G

COMMON CONTROL DUPLICATED COMMON CONTROL

ME

X-I

P2

/ ME

X-I

P

Main Processor CardMEX-IP2 or MEX-IP

with optional DBX, DBM, CLA or MAP

Static Wrist Strap

Main Control Card Installation Manual Introduction 1-43

Page 62: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

trol C

ard

Loca

tion

in C

oral

Sys

tem

1

Connecting the LAN cable:

LAN connections to MAP, CLA, or LIU cards are established via RJ-45 connectors

mounted on LDF (LAN Data Filter) panels. Four connectors per each LDF. The

connection is made from an RJ-45 connector on the front panel of a control card via a

crossover cable that is routed to the LDF panel on the rear side of the Coral FlexiCom

5000 cabinet. See Figure 1-24, Figure 1-25, and Figure 1-26.

The LDF incorporates improved RFI immunity. These filters enable the Coral and all

relevant peripheral interface circuits to be fully protected against radio-frequency

interference (RFI) and meet or exceed all requirements and specifications of

telecommunications and electrical safety authorities world-wide.

The connections between the RJ-45 jack on the front panel of the MAP, CLA, or LIU

control cards and the RJ-45 jacks on the LDF panel at the rear side of the cabinet are

to be made by a H624 crossover cable. The crossover cable ensures that the pinout

order from the control cards remain constant from the front panel to the LAN/WAN

connection. See Figure 1-23.

Figure 1-23 H624 Crossover Cable

The Coral FlexiCom 5000 cabinet is supplied with:

1 (one) LDF panel (four RJ-45 connectors for MAP, CLA, LIU, PUGW-2G,

PUGW, UGW, IPG cards)

4 (four) H624 crossover cables

Additional H624 cables (Catalog Number 7244-9043100) and three LDF panels

(Catalog Number 7244-9043100) may be field installed as required.

It is imperative that a crossover cable (Catalog Number 7244-8000624) be used

to make this connection. If an ordinary cable is used the cards will not be

integrated into the system.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

RJ-45RJ-45

H 624 Cable

Cat. No. 72448000624

1-44 Introduction Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 63: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

trol C

ard

Loca

tion

in C

oral

Sys

tem

1

Figure 1-24 MAP/CLA/LIU Card Mounted onto FlexiCom 5032 (via an LDF unit)

Figure 1-25 MAP/CLA/LIU Card Mounted onto FlexiCom 5048 (via an LDF unit)

MAP/CLA/LIU Card

LDF filter for MAP, CLA, and LIU

RJ-45 Cables( )

to Front Panels of Controland Peripheral Cards

Crossover H624

(Cat. No. 7244-8000624)

RJ-45 Cables( )

to Front Panels of Controland Peripheral Cards

Crossover H624

(Cat. No. 7244-8000624)

LDF filter for MAP, CLA, and LIU

MAP/CLA/LIU Card

Main Control Card Installation Manual Introduction 1-45

Page 64: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

trol C

ard

Loca

tion

in C

oral

Sys

tem

1

Coral FlexiCom 5000 connects to the LAN/WAN via an LDF, as shown in

Figure 1-26.

Figure 1-26 Coral FlexiCom 5000 Connector for MAP/CLA/LIU

LAN / WAN

H 624 CableCat. No. 72448000624

RJ-45 Crossover Cablefrom LDF to Front Panel

of MEX-IP2 Card

Pin #Pin 1 Tx(+)Pin 2 Tx(-)Pin 3 Rx(+)Pin 4 not usedPin 5 not usedPin 6 Rx(-)Pin 7 not usedPin 8 not used

LDFCat. No. 72449043100

Nomination

RJ-45RJ-45

RESET

MEX-IP2

LAN

SAU

MAP

RST

COM

LAN

1-46 Introduction Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 65: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

trol C

ard

Loca

tion

in C

oral

Sys

tem

1

.................................................................................. Coral Wave Gateway (IPx) 500M

The Coral Wave Gateway 500M includes one control card slot marked MCP and eight

universal I/O card slots marked 1 through 8.

Table 1-13 lists the card types that can be inserted into each card slot in the Coral

Wave Gateway 500M cage.

Table 1-13 Coral Wave Gateway 500M Card Slot Assignments

Figure 1-27 Main Control Processor Card Housed in Wave Gateway 500M Cage

Type Card Slot Possible Card Types

Common Control MCP MCP-IPx2 with MAP

Peripheral I/O Slots 1-8

Peripheral interface cards

Including PUGW-2Gipx orPUGWipx with MRC cards.

16 27 38 45

Pow

er S

uppl

y

MCP-IPx2 with MAPStatic Wrist Strap

UNIVERSAL I/O SLOTS

PU

GW

ipx

with

MR

C

Main Control Card Installation Manual Introduction 1-47

Page 66: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

trol C

ard

Loca

tion

in C

oral

Sys

tem

1

.................................................................................. Coral Wave Gateway (IPx) 800M

The Coral Wave Gateway 800M includes two control card slots marked CONTROL

CARDS, eight universal card slots marked 1 through 8, and one shared service card

slot marked 9.

Table 1-14 lists the card types that can be inserted into each card slot in the Coral Wave

Gateway 800M cage.

Table 1-14 Coral Wave Gateway 800M Card Slot Assignments

Figure 1-28 Main Control Processor Cards Housed in Wave Gateway 800M Cage

Type Card Slot Possible Card Types

Common Control

CONTROL CARDS (right slot) MEX-IP2 with MAP

CONTROL CARDS (left slot) HDC Card

Universal I/O Slots

1-8

Any peripheral interface card or any shared service card

Including PUGW-2Gipx orPUGWipx with MRC cards. ƒn

Shared service

9 Shared service cardsM

EX

-IP

2 w

ith M

AP

PU

GW

with

MR

C

Pow

er S

uppl

y

Static Wrist Strap

Sha

red

Ser

vice

UNIVERSAL I/O SLOTS

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

HD

C

1-48 Introduction Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 67: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

trol C

ard

Loca

tion

in C

oral

Sys

tem

1

.................................................................................. Coral Wave Gateway (IPx) 3000M

The Coral Wave Gateway 3000M includes three control card slots. Two of the control

card slots are marked CONTROL CARDS. The second slot houses the 4GC card. The

third slot houses the PB-24 card. The slots marked 1 through 8 house eight universal

I/O card slots.

Table 1-15 lists the card types that can be inserted into each card slot in the Coral Wave

Gateway 3000M cage.

Table 1-15 Coral Wave Gateway 3000M Card Slot Assignments

Figure 1-29 Main Control Processor Cards Housed in Wave Gateway 3000M Cage

Type Card Slot Possible Card Types

Common Control

CONTROL CARDS (right slot) MEX-IP2 with MAP

CONTROL CARDS (left slot) 4GC Card

PB-24 PB-24 Card

Universal I/O Slots

1-8

Any peripheral interface card or any shared service card

Including PUGW-2Gipx orPUGWipx with MRC cards.

Pow

er S

uppl

y

PB

-24

UNIVERSAL I/O SLOTS

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

ME

X-I

P2

with

MA

P

PU

GW

with

MR

C

4GC

Static Wrist Strap

Main Control Card Installation Manual Introduction 1-49

Page 68: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

trol C

ard

Loca

tion

in C

oral

Sys

tem

1

.................................................................................. Coral Wave Gateway (FlexiCom) 400

The Coral FlexiCom 400 contain 4 control card slots marked A through D, and 16

Universal I/O card slots marked slot 1 through 16.

Table 1-16 lists the Control, Shared Service and Peripheral Interface card types which

may be inserted into each card slot in the Coral Wave Gateway 400 cabinet.

Table 1-16 Coral Wave Gateway 400 Card Slot Assignments

Figure 1-30 Main Control Processor Card Housed in Wave Gateway 400 Cabinet

Type Card Slot

Possible Card Types

Common Control

A None - Not Used

B-C MEX-IP2 with MAP

D HDC

Universal I/O Slots

1-16Any Shared Service Card, or Any Peripheral Interface Card. Including PUGW-2Gipx or PUGWipx with MRC cards.

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101 11 12 13 14 15 16

RIN

GE

R P

OW

ER

SU

PP

LY (

RP

S)

PO

WE

R S

UP

PLY

(P

PS

or

AP

S-2

)

HD

C

UNIVERSAL I/O SLOTS

C DBA

Main Processor CardMEX-IP2 with MAP

and optional DBX or DBM

Static Wrist Strap

PU

GW

with

MR

C

1-50 Introduction Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 69: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

trol C

ard

Loca

tion

in C

oral

Sys

tem

1

.................................................................................. Coral Wave Gateway (FlexiCom) 5000 Main Cabinet

The Coral Wave Gateway 5000 system is housed in one or more, free-standing, floor

mounted cabinet(s). Each system consists of one main cabinet, which contains the

Common Control Shelf (single or duplicated) and Peripheral Shelves, and one or more

optional Expansion cabinets. The Expansion cabinets contain only additional

Peripheral Shelves.

Coral Wave Gateway 5000 Main cabinets are equipped with either 32 or 48 peripheral

card slots. One control shelf and two or three peripheral shelves, respectively. The

Coral Wave Gateway 5032 main cabinet is built into a 3-shelf cabinet, illustrated in

Figure 1-31. Figure 1-24 displays the location of the MAP card. The Coral Wave

Gateway 5048 main cabinet is built into a 4-shelf cabinet, illustrated in Figure 1-24.

The card section of the Common Control Shelf extends only half way across the card

cage, and contains seven card slots, marked A through G.

Main cabinet issues for Duplicated Common Control systems are equipped with a

second motherboard attached to the card cage, which is used to house the Duplicated

Common Control cards. Table 1-17 lists the Control card types which may be inserted

into each card slot in the Common Control Shelf of the Coral Wave Gateway 5000

main cabinet.

Table 1-17 Coral Wave GW 5000 Main Cabinet Control Card Slots

Table 1-18 Coral Wave GW 5000 Main Cabinet Peripheral Card Slots

Type Card Slot

Possible Card Types

Common Control

A 4GC (Issue 25B - 7.17/9.00 or Issue 32 - 7.19/9.01)

B-C MEX-IP2 with MAP

None D-G None - Not Used

Card Slot

Shelf Numbered

Cards Housed:

Slot 1 Even PB24

Slot 1 Odd Any Shared Service card

Slot 2 Even&Odd Any Shared Service card

Slot 3 - 18 Even&OddAny Shared Service card or any Peripheral Interface card

Including PUGW-2G or PUGW with MRC cards.

Main Control Card Installation Manual Introduction 1-51

Page 70: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

trol C

ard

Loca

tion

in C

oral

Sys

tem

1

Figure 1-31 Main Control Processor Card Housed in Wave Gateway 5032 Cabinet

CPS 4GC CPS 4GC

CO

NT

RO

L P

OW

ER

SU

PP

LY

QU

AD

GR

OU

P C

ON

TR

OL

LE

R

CO

NT

RO

L P

OW

ER

SU

PP

LY

QU

AD

GR

OU

P C

ON

TR

OL

LE

R

CO

MM

ON

CO

NT

RO

L S

HE

LF

LO

WE

R P

ER

IPH

ER

AL

SH

EL

FU

PP

ER

P

ER

IPH

ER

AL

SH

EL

F

A B C D E F GA B C D E F G

COMMON CONTROL DUPLICATED COMMON CONTROL

Static Wrist Strap

Main Processor CardMEX-IP2 with MAP

and optional DBX or DBM

ME

X-I

P2

with

MA

P

ME

X-I

P2

with

MA

P

PU

GW

with

MR

C

PUGW with MRC

1-52 Introduction Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 71: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Main Control Card Installation Manual

Chapter

2

Main Control Processor Cards

2.1 MCP-IPx2 Card.....................................................................2-1

2.2 MEX-IP2 Card.....................................................................2-39

Page 72: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document
Page 73: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

M

2.1

ain Control Card Installation M

MCP-IPx2 Card(Coral FlexiCom 200, IPx 500 and CDRS 200, 200E)

MC

P-IP

x2 C

ard

(Cor

al F

lexi

Com

200

, IPx

500

and

CD

RS

200,

200

E)2

.................................................................................. General Information

This section describes the features and functions of the MCP-IPx2 main control

processor card.

The MCP-IPx2 control processor card is installed in the following systems:

Coral IPx 500

Coral FlexiCom 200

CDRS 200

CDRS 200E

The MCP-IPx2 card (see Figure 2-1) provides RS-232E programming and

maintenance interface, Software Authorization Unit (SAU) and flash interface. See

Port Management, page 2-4. The MCP-IPx2 contains multi-pin connectors and support

circuitry for the addition of MAP, CLA, DBM, DBX, and LIU daughterboards. It

integrates the main processor, memory management circuitry, local bus interface,

real-time clock, generic feature software memory, and database memory.

The MCP-IPx2 supervises overall system operation by executing system-wide

processes. These processes include port connection management, feature

management, generic feature software installation, feature authorization,

configuration database management, database backup and restoration, program

interface input/output, and diagnostic testing.

Inserting or removing the MCP-IPx2 control card when power is applied could damage

the card. Before inserting or removing the MCP-IPx2 control card, verify that the power

supply card switch is turned off.

anual Main Control Processor Cards 2-1

Page 74: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MC

P-IP

x2 C

ard

(Cor

al F

lexi

Com

200

, IPx

500

and

CD

RS

200,

200

E)2

Figure 2-1 MCP-IPx2 Card - Right Side

DIP Switches

Reset

Status Display

KB0RS-232E

MCP-IPx2

DBX / CLA / MAP connector

DBM / MAP connector

P11

BUSCONTROLLER

LIU connectors

SAUconnector

LAN Indicator

CPU386EX

Network Interface Connector for LIU

RJ-45

REMOVEBEFORE

USE

BackupBattery

P22

IMC4,IMC8,IMC16

Watchdog Indicator

BATTERY INSULATOR(PULL DOWN TO REMOVE)

2-2 Main Control Processor Cards Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 75: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MC

P-IP

x2 C

ard

(Cor

al F

lexi

Com

200

, IPx

500

and

CD

RS

200,

200

E)2

Figure 2-2 MCP-IPx2 Card - Left Side

Option DIP Switches1-8 Always Set to the Right1 Set to the Left for PI-LAN (LIU) Connections Only3 Set to the Left for IMC4

LAN Indicator

MCP-IPx2

MCP-IPx2

Mounting Holesfor DBX

Mounting Holesfor DBM

Mounting Holesfor MAP or CLA

Mounting Holesfor LIU

7-Segment Display5VDC LED

Reset

IMCx ReleaseButton

RS-232E

KB0

Set DIP Switch# 1to the Right for PI-KB0 Connections

IMC4,IMC8,IMC16

IMC4,IMC8,IMC16

WatchdogIndicator

Main Control Card Installation Manual Main Control Processor Cards 2-3

Page 76: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MC

P-IP

x2 C

ard

(Cor

al F

lexi

Com

200

, IPx

500

and

CD

RS

200,

200

E)2

Port Management

In order to manage port connections and feature operation, the main processor

communicates via the following HDLC buses:

MSBipx (backplane) card in the IPx 500 and CDRS 200E

MSBsl (backplane) card in the FlexiCom 200 and CDRS 200

Communication is facilitated via the local card processors on every peripheral card

both in the main and in the expansion cabinets.

The main processor receives status messages from the card processors regarding port

activity. It determines the appropriate response based on the programming entries

contained in the system database. The main processor then instructs the appropriate

card processor as to what action to take with each port.

Memory Management

All system memory resides on the MCP-IPx2 card. The 2MB Static Random Access

Memory (SRAM) is located directly on the MCP-IPx2 card. The MCP-IPx2 also acts

as a mother card to MAP, CLA, DBM, DBX, and LIU daughterboards. The DBM

contains 2, 4, or 8 MB of SRAM expansion memory. The DBX card contains 1MB of

SRAM memory.

Flash memory, located on the flash card, stores the generic feature software. Flash

memory determines the operation of the system. RAM, both on the MCP-IPx2 and on

the DBM or DBX expansion cards, stores the system configuration database, and is

used as a run memory for general purposes. The flash card also stores a copy of the

configuration database.

Database memory and real-time clock functions in the Coral system are protected

against power loss by long-life lithium backup batteries. A battery is installed on the

MCP-IPx2 card; it supplies both the MCP-IPx2 and the DBM expansion card with

backup power. A monitoring circuit on the MCP-IPx2 and DBX card (not on the DBM

card) constantly measures the voltage level of its battery. It signals the main processor

when the remaining energy stored in the battery approaches the point that it can no

longer provide sufficient power to maintain the memory circuitry.

If the DBM card is separated from the MCP-IPx2 card, all of the stored information on

the DBM card is lost.

2-4 Main Control Processor Cards Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 77: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MC

P-IP

x2 C

ard

(Cor

al F

lexi

Com

200

, IPx

500

and

CD

RS

200,

200

E)2

The generic feature software and feature authorization information is installed and

updated into the flash card using the FMprog PC-utility. Similarly, the system database

is regularly backed up to, and may be transferred and restored from, an

IMC4 / IMC8 / IMC16 card kept in the flash drive.

The Program Interface Facility

The PI (Program Interface) and CoralVIEW CVA/CVD provides a text-based facility

for reviewing and changing the system configuration and database. It enables the

performance and monitoring of diagnostic routines. The PI can be accessed via a

simple data terminal, a personal computer, or via the LAN if a MAP or an LIU card is

installed.

The PI and CoralVIEW CVA/CVD/CVT can be accessed via:

RS-232E data terminal port (KB0) provided on the MCP-IPx2 front panel. See

Figure 2-3.

RJ-45 LAN port provided on the MCP-IPx2 top panel, via the LAN (when an

LIU card is attached). See Figure 2-3.

RJ-45 port provided on the MAP top panel via the LAN (when a MAP card is

attached). See Figure 2-3.

In the IPx 500M and CDRS 200E main cage KB1 / KB2 / KB3 RS-232E port.

See Chapter 9 of the Coral IPx 500 Installation Procedure and Hardware

Reference Manual.

In the FlexiCom 200 and CDRS 200 base unit KB1 RS-232E port provided on

the MSBsl card at the top of the cabinet.

Do not remove the IMC4 / IMC8 / IMC16 card from its drive during system operation.

Doing so while the system is ON AIR will cause the system to shut down.

Main Control Card Installation Manual Main Control Processor Cards 2-5

Page 78: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MC

P-IP

x2 C

ard

(Cor

al F

lexi

Com

200

, IPx

500

and

CD

RS

200,

200

E)2

.................................................................................. Card Features

Figure 2-1, Figure 2-2, and Figure 2-3 illustrate the front panel and layout of the

MCP-IPx2 card. The front panel contains various elements. Table 2-1 describes the

components of the front panel.

Figure 2-3 MCP-IPx2 Card Front Panel Top View

LAN RJ-45 port

Option DIP switches1-8 Always set to the right1 Set to the left for PI-LAN (LIU) connections only3 Set to the left for IMC4 (FMsl)

MCP-IPx2

5VDC indicator (green)

Reset pushbutton

KB0RS-232E Serialprogramming port interface

Flash cardrelease button

Flash card

7-segmentstatus display

Watchdog indicator (red)

LAN indicator (green)

KB0 Set DIP switch #1 to theright for PI-KB0 connections

Set DIP Switch #1 to the leftfor PI-LAN (LIU) Connections

In Coral FlexiCom 200and CDRS 200Set DIP switch #3 to the left for IMC4 (FMsl)

2-6 Main Control Processor Cards Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 79: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MC

P-IP

x2 C

ard

(Cor

al F

lexi

Com

200

, IPx

500

and

CD

RS

200,

200

E)2

Table 2-1 MCP-IPx2 Control Card Front Panel Components

Component Function

LAN Indicator (green)

Lit when DIP switch #1 is switched to the left and an LIU card is installed, indicating that the PI is accessed via the LAN.

Option DIP switches

All switches should be set to OFF (right) so that the system will respond after a power failure. DIP switch #1 is switched to the left for LAN connection. In

this case, all interaction with the PI is carried via the LAN and not via the KB0 RS-232 port.

DIP switch #3 is switched to the left for IMC4 (FMsl) in Coral FlexiCom 200 and CDRS 200 systems.

DIP switch #3 is switched to the right for IMC8/16 in Coral IPx 500 and CDRS 200E systems.

Watchdog Indicator (red)

For the manufacturer’s use, only. If this red LED indicator is lit, switch DIP switch #8 to the right.

7-Segment Status Display

Used for alarms and diagnostic functions. A full list of possible displays is provided later on in this chapter. See MCP-IPx2 Status Display Codes, page 2-9 and Specifications - MCP-IPx2, page 2-36.The Green LED 7-Segment display is lit to indicate normal system operation and 5V power on.

CPU Reset Pushbutton

Forces the Coral system to restart.Used to partially initialize the system (cause a warm restart procedure), simulating the procedure that occurs automatically when power is applied to the system.Forcing initialization by pressing the reset pushbutton immediately disconnects all calls in progress but does not set the database to default. However, resetting the main processor while the database is being programmed (P on 7-segment status display) may corrupt the database. If this happens, the database must be restored.CAUTIONPressing this button will cause partial initialization and drop all calls.Additionally, all keyset call logs will be cleared.

Flash Memory card Used to save and restore the database as well as to store the Generic feature software. See Chapter 4, Flash Memory Cards IMC4(FMsl), IMC8, IMC16.CAUTIONInserting or removing this card while the MCP-IPx2 card is powered could result in damage to the card. Inserting or removing this card will cause a partial initialization. All calls in progress will be terminated.

Flash Release Button

Used to release the flash memory card.

Main Control Card Installation Manual Main Control Processor Cards 2-7

Page 80: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MC

P-IP

x2 C

ard

(Cor

al F

lexi

Com

200

, IPx

500

and

CD

RS

200,

200

E)2

Table 2-2 MCP-IPx2 Control Card Top Panel Components

Table 2-3 MCP-IPx2 Control Card Layout Components

Accessing the Front Panel Functions in the FlexiCom 200 in Operation

The Coral FlexiCom 200 Base Unit front cover provides access to the following

components:

Seven segment display (provides indications of system status)

Reset button (to reset the system)

FMsl card (flash memory card containing the system software and database

backup)

RS-232E connector (for communication with an ASCII terminal)

KB0 Port Data Terminal Port, DTE Interface, used to connect an RS-232E serial cable, providing access to the PI or CoralVIEW CVA/CVD/CVT.Default configuration:9600 bps, No parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, VT-100. See KB0 RS-232E Programming Port, page 2-11.

Component Function

Component Function

LAN connector RJ-45, LAN connector located on the top edge of the card. This connector is used to connect to the PI via the LAN when an LIU card is supplied and DIP switch #1 is switched to the left. When these conditions are met, the green indicator is lit.

Component Function

LIU connectors For attaching the LIU card

Backup Battery For supporting memory during power failure

SAU Connector For attaching the SAU

P11 Connector For attaching 1st and 2nd DBX cards, or MAP or CLA cards

P22 Connector For attaching up to two DBM cards or one DBM and one MAP card

IMC4/8/16 Drive For housing IMC4/8/16 flash memory card

2-8 Main Control Processor Cards Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 81: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MC

P-IP

x2 C

ard

(Cor

al F

lexi

Com

200

, IPx

500

and

CD

RS

200,

200

E)2

MCP-IPx2 Status Display Codes

The MCP-IPx2 numeric status display indicates various operating and error states of

the Coral system, and can provide valuable information to assist in the maintenance of

the system. Table 2-4 lists the various status indications.

A “.” (dot) appears during normal system operation, when the 5V supply is functional.

A "0" appears on the status display whenever the system is off-line for maintenance

testing, or to install or update the generic software.

A “b” in the status display indicates that a backup battery on the MCP-IPx2 or on a

DBX card no longer has sufficient energy to maintain the memory circuitry if system

power is lost. Each time a programming session is started from the PI, any faulty

battery is identified. The system database should be saved as soon as possible to a flash

unit, and the faulty battery must be replaced as soon as the system can be shut down,

to ensure continued system reliability.

An “E” indicates that the main processor has been interrupted to prevent database

corruption during a power fluctuation. This condition should clear itself momentarily.

An “L” indicates that the SAU cannot be detected at the SAU port on the top right side

of the MCP-IPx2. Usually, this indicates one or more of the following:

The device is no longer present or is not securely fastened to the MCP-IPx2.

There is a mismatch between the SAU device number and the SAU software

key number.

A “P” appears during software backup.

All other error status indications generally indicate a more serious problem, and are

likely to be accompanied by considerable system malfunction. If an error indication

does not appear to affect system operation, save the database to DB0.DEF

immediately. For further details, see Saving to the Flash Card, page 4-14. When the

system can be restarted without disrupting service, press the reset pushbutton on the

front panel of the MCP-IPx2.

Do not remove the IMC memory card from the MCP-IPx2, press the Reset button, or

switch power OFF when “P” is illuminated. Doing so might damage the IMC data.

Main Control Card Installation Manual Main Control Processor Cards 2-9

Page 82: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MC

P-IP

x2 C

ard

(Cor

al F

lexi

Com

200

, IPx

500

and

CD

RS

200,

200

E)2

Table 2-4 lists the Status Display Codes and their meaning.

Table 2-4 MCP-IPx2 Status Display Codes

Pressing the Reset button interrupts all calls in progress and causes the system to

initialize, possibly discarding the database information stored in the database memory

and reloading the database from the IMC 4/8/16 flash card. Additionally, all keyset call

logs will be cleared.

Status Display

System Status

. Normal System Operation

0 Off-Line Monitor/Diagnostics Mode

8 Appears briefly during powerup before other numbers

1,2,3,4,5,6 Appear Briefly During Initialization

b Lithium Backup Battery (MCP-IPx2 or DBX) Low

C Flash Memory Checksum Error

E Map RAM, Coding PROM, or Memory Configuration Error

F AC Fail Active (System halted due to power fluctuation)

L The Software Authorization Unit (SAU) cannot be detected at the SAU port on the top right side of the MCP-IPx2. Generally, this indicates one or more of the following: The device is no longer present or is not securely fastened to the

MCP-IPx2. There is a mismatch between the number of the installed SAU

device and the software SAU key number.

CAUTIONIf the SAU is removed from the MCP-IPx2, the Coral system automatically ceases call processing after 14 days. Relevant messages appear on the PI, warning that the system will not operate without the proper SAU.See Software Authorization Management, page 5-1 for details.

P Programming the flash memory during software backup

2-10 Main Control Processor Cards Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 83: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MC

P-IP

x2 C

ard

(Cor

al F

lexi

Com

200

, IPx

500

and

CD

RS

200,

200

E)2

KB0 RS-232E Programming Port

The serial interface of the KB0 programming port on the MCP-IPx2 conforms to the

EIA RS-232E specification. It is wired as a Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) device

using a popular 9-pin, male, D-type connector. The interface allows connection of a

common, asynchronous, ASCII data terminal, personal computer or external modem

for programming the various features of the Coral system and monitoring diagnostic

information.

Figure 2-4 illustrates the pin assignments of the DB-9S connector. Table 2-5 lists the

pin functions. See Chapter 2 of the relevant Installation Procedure and Hardware

Reference Procedure for detailed connection information and terminal setup.

Table 2-5 MCP-IPx2 KB0 RS-232E Interface Pin Functions

Figure 2-4 MCP-IPx2 KB0 Pin Assignment

KB0 SetupAt first initialization, the baud rate is set to 9600 bps, No parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit,

VT-100. The baud rate can be set from 300 bps to 115,200 bps. Consult the Program Interface Reference Manual (Chapter-17 Terminal Setup -

Route: TERM,0) for instructions on the database programming required.

Pin Designation Pin # Function

Receive Data 2 Input to MCP-IPx2

Transmit Data 3 Output from MCP-IPx2

Data Terminal Ready 4 Output from MCP-IPx2

Signal Ground 5 Signal return

Data Set Ready 6 Input to MCP-IPx2

Request to Send 7 Output from MCP-IPx2

Clear to Send 8 Input to MCP-IPx2

4 - DATA TERMINAL READY

2 - RECEIVE DATA

3 - TRANSMIT DATA

5 - SIGNAL GROUND

CLEAR TO SEND - 8

REQUEST TO SEND - 7

DATA SET READY - 6

1 - N.C.

CLEAR TO SEND - 8

N.C. - 9

Main Control Card Installation Manual Main Control Processor Cards 2-11

Page 84: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MC

P-IP

x2 C

ard

(Cor

al F

lexi

Com

200

, IPx

500

and

CD

RS

200,

200

E)2

RJ-45 LAN Port (LIU)

The RJ-45 LAN port enables PI programming the various features of the Coral system

and monitoring diagnostic information via the LAN and is identical in setup to the

KB0 connection. In order for the RJ-45 LAN port to be used, an LIU card must be

installed on the MCP-IPx2 card and configured. The LIU card translates the protocol

used by the KB0 connector to the protocol used by the LAN. See Chapter 7, LAN

Interface Unit (LIU).

RJ-45 LAN Port SetupThe baud rate is set during first initialization at 9600 bps, No parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop

bit, VT-100. The baud rate can be set from 300 bps to 115,200 bps. Refer to the

Program Interface Reference Manual (Chapter-17 Terminal Setup - Route: TERM,0)

for instructions on the database programming required.

The following table shows the interface connections of the pins on the LIU RJ-45

connectors.

Table 2-6 MCP-IPx2 RJ-45 Interface Connection (LIU)

Figure 2-5 MCP-IPx2 RJ-45 Interface Connector PIN Assignment (LIU)

Pin # Function

Pin 1 Tx(+)

Pin 2 Tx(-)

Pin 3 Rx(+)

Pin 4 not used

Pin 5 not used

Pin 6 Rx(-)

Pin 7 not used

Pin 8 not used

8

1

RJ-45

2-12 Main Control Processor Cards Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 85: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MC

P-IP

x2 C

ard

(Cor

al F

lexi

Com

200

, IPx

500

and

CD

RS

200,

200

E)2

.................................................................................. Card Connectors

The component side of the MCP-IPx2 card includes the following connectors, as

described in Figure 2-3 and Table 2-1.

Software Authorization Unit

The Software Authorization Unit (SAU) enables a set of permissions and feature

authorizations associated with its unique identification number. The Coral software

detects and verifies the permission settings of the SAU on the Control card

(MCP-IPx2) enabling the system to function properly. For more information, see

Chapter 5, Software Authorization Unit (SAU).

Flash Memory Card Drive (for IMC4 or FMsl cards)

In the Coral FlexiCom 200 or CDRS 200 systems the flash memory card slot houses

an Integrated Memory Card with an 4MB flash memory capacity IMC4 (FMsl). For

further information, see Chapter 4, Flash Memory Cards

IMC4(FMsl), IMC8, IMC16.

By default, the MCP-IPx2 card is configured to operate using IMC8 or ICM16 flash memory cards. In this setting, all DIP switches are set to the right. If you intend to install an IMC4 (FMsl) flash memory card, set the number 3 DIP switch to the left position.

Flash Memory Card Drive (for IMC8 and IMC16 cards)

In the Coral IPx 500 or CDRS 200E systems the flash memory card slot houses an

Integrated Memory Card with an 8MB flash memory capacity (IMC8) or 16MB flash

memory capacity (IMC16). For further information, see Chapter 4, Flash Memory

Cards IMC4(FMsl), IMC8, IMC16.

DBM Expansion Memory Card

The DBM card is a memory expansion card. The DBM card adds an additional 4 or

8 MB SRAM to the Coral system main control (version 15 and higher). The DBM card

is used to expand the storage capacity to the configuration database. The DBM

memory is protected by the lithium battery located on the MCP-IPx2 card. This battery

continues to supply the SRAM when power to the Coral system is removed. The card

Main Control Card Installation Manual Main Control Processor Cards 2-13

Page 86: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MC

P-IP

x2 C

ard

(Cor

al F

lexi

Com

200

, IPx

500

and

CD

RS

200,

200

E)2

includes a connector on its top side, allowing for another memory or application card

to be connected. For further information, see Chapter 3, Expansion Memory Cards.

DBX Expansion Memory Card

The DBX card is a memory expansion card. The DBX card adds additional 1MB

SRAM storage to the Coral system main control. The card is equipped with an

extension connector on its top side, allowing for another expansion memory or

application card to be connected on top of it. The card also contains a long-life,

replaceable lithium energy cell which continues to supply power to the SRAM when

power to the Coral system is removed. A battery monitoring circuit produces a system

alarm when the energy level in a lithium cell drops below a reliable level. For further

information, see Chapter 3, Expansion Memory Cards.

Application Card (MAP and CLA)

The MAP or CLA card may be installed for specific applications requiring either a

MAP or a CLA card. For more information, see Chapter 6, Application Cards.

LIU Connector

The LAN Interface Unit (LIU) is a card that enables the MCP-IPx2 to perform

maintenance from the RJ-45 LAN connector. This card is redundant if a MAP card is

attached to the MCP-IPx2. For more information, see Chapter 7, LAN Interface Unit

(LIU).

Backup Lithium Battery

A new lithium battery can maintain power to the MCP-IPx2 and DBM memory

circuitry and real-time clock for approximately 90 days. The battery is not recharged

by the system power. Thus, if the battery has powered the memory and real-time clock

for an extended period and near depletion is suspected, the contents of the memory

must be backed up, and the battery must be replaced. The internal diagnostic

procedure will cause a “b” to appear on the 7-segment display of the MCP-IPx2 front

panel, indicating that the battery should be replaced. The backup battery includes an

insulator that is removed before inserting the card into its slot. Figure 2-1 identifies the

location of the battery holder and illustrates the insulator removal.

2-14 Main Control Processor Cards Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 87: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MC

P-IP

x2 C

ard

(Cor

al F

lexi

Com

200

, IPx

500

and

CD

RS

200,

200

E)2

Testing the Lithium BatteryThe battery voltage, tested under load, can be used to determine its state of charge.

Voltage measured across an unused battery connected to the memory circuitry must be

between 3.30 and 3.35 volts. If the voltage is less than 2.50 volts, replace the battery.

For first time use, remove the protective battery insulator. See Figure 2-1.

Replacing the Lithium Battery1 Carefully lift the battery with your thumbnail.

2 Insert the new battery with the + (positive) symbol appearing on top.

Do not use any metal tool to release or insert the battery. Doing so could result in a

short circuit and damage the battery.

Explosion and Environmental Hazards.

There is a danger of explosion if the battery is replaced incorrectly. Replace the battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to requirements specified by the battery manufacturer and/or local regulatory agencies.

Main Control Card Installation Manual Main Control Processor Cards 2-15

Page 88: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MC

P-IP

x2 C

ard

(Cor

al F

lexi

Com

200

, IPx

500

and

CD

RS

200,

200

E)2

.................................................................................. Inserting the MCP-IPx2 Card into its Slot

The MCP-IPx2 card is installed in a reserved slot. For further information, see Control

Card Location in Coral System, page 1-21.

1 Verify that the power to the main Coral unit is removed.

2 Turn off the power supply card switch in the main unit.

3 If expansion cages are installed in the Coral system, turn the power supply of

all expansion cages OFF.

4 Carefully remove the protective battery insulator from under the top contact of

the lithium battery holder on the MCP-IPx2 card. See Figure 2-1.

5 Verify that the DIP switches on the front panel of the MCP-IPx2 card are set

as follows (see Figure 2-3):

DIP switches 1 is set to the left for LIU connections, only (for PI LAN).

DIP switch 3 is set to the left only when IMC4 card is inserted (for Coral

FlexiCom 200 and CDRS 200).

DIP switches 2 and 4-8 are set to the right for everything else

6 If DBX cards are installed on the MCP-IPx2, carefully remove the protective

battery insulator from under the top contact of the lithium battery holder on the

DBX card. See Figure 3-3 on page 3-10.

7 Insert the MCP-IPx2 card fully into its slot.

Do not insert or remove the control card wile the Coral is powered. Sudden power

surges could damage system components. Verify that the power switch is turned off and

the AC power cord is disconnected.

2-16 Main Control Processor Cards Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 89: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MC

P-IP

x2 C

ard

(Cor

al F

lexi

Com

200

, IPx

500

and

CD

RS

200,

200

E)2

.................................................................................. Removing the MCP-IPx2 Card

1 Perform the Database Binary Backup procedure.

2 Verify that the numeric status display on the main control processor card does

NOT read “P”. When “P” is illuminated on the numeric status display, data is

being written to the flash card.

3 Turn off the power supply card switch in the main unit.

4 If expansion cages are installed in the Coral system, turn the power supply of

all expansion cages OFF.

5 Remove the MCP-IPx2 control card from the main Coral unit.

Before removing the MCP-IPx2 card from the Coral system, do the following:

1.Perform the Database Binary Backup procedure.

2.Verify that the database is not being backed up: check that the main control card

numeric status display does not read “P”. Data will be lost if power is removed from

the system when “P” is illuminated.

3.Turn the Coral power supply OFF. The flash card could be damaged if the MCP-IPx2

card is removed when the system is powered.

Main Control Card Installation Manual Main Control Processor Cards 2-17

Page 90: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MC

P-IP

x2 C

ard

(Cor

al F

lexi

Com

200

, IPx

500

and

CD

RS

200,

200

E)2

.................................................................................. Daughterboard Configurations

Figure 2-6 through Figure 2-21 displays the different possible assembly

configurations of daughterboards onto the MCP-IPx2 as summarized in Table 2-7.

Table 2-7 MCP-IPx2 Daughterboard Assembly Configurations on MCP-IPx2

LevelSee Figure

1 2

DBM — Figure 2-6 and Figure 2-8

DBX — Figure 2-9 and Figure 2-11

MAP — Figure 2-13 and Figure 2-19

CLA — Figure 2-16

DBM DBM Figure 2-7 and Figure 2-8

DBM MAP Figure 2-14 and Figure 2-19

DBM CLA Figure 2-15 and Figure 2-20

DBX DBX Figure 2-10, Figure 2-11, and Figure 2-12

DBX CLA Figure 2-17 and Figure 2-21

DBX MAP Figure 2-18 and Figure 2-22

Once the system database has been installed, the position of the daughterboards

(upper and lower) must not be changed. Doing so will cause the Coral system to

malfunction.

2-18 Main Control Processor Cards Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 91: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MC

P-IP

x2 C

ard

(Cor

al F

lexi

Com

200

, IPx

500

and

CD

RS

200,

200

E)2

Figure 2-6 One DBM Card Assembled onto an MCP-IPx2 Card - Front View

MCP-IPx2

3

2

1

5

4

Metal screwand washer(x2)

Metal screwand washer(x2)

Metal screwand washer(x1)

Metal screwand washer(x1)

Metalspacertype A(x3)

2

1

1stDBM

Main Control Card Installation Manual Main Control Processor Cards 2-19

Page 92: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MC

P-IP

x2 C

ard

(Cor

al F

lexi

Com

200

, IPx

500

and

CD

RS

200,

200

E)2

Figure 2-7 Two DBM cards Assembled onto an MCP-IPx-2 - Front View

1stDBM

MCP-IPx2

6

7

82

1

4Metalspacertype B

(x3)

5

3

Metalspacertype A(x3)

2

1

2ndDBM

Metal screwand washer(x2)

Metal screwand washer(x2)

Metal screwand washer(x1)

Metal screwand washer(x1)

2-20 Main Control Processor Cards Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 93: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MC

P-IP

x2 C

ard

(Cor

al F

lexi

Com

200

, IPx

500

and

CD

RS

200,

200

E)2

Figure 2-8 Layout of DBM Card Assembled onto MCP-IPx2

U24 U25 U26 U27

Mounting holesfor metal screws,washers, and spacers

DBM

MCP-IPx2

2nd DBM

1st DBM

Main Control Card Installation Manual Main Control Processor Cards 2-21

Page 94: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MC

P-IP

x2 C

ard

(Cor

al F

lexi

Com

200

, IPx

500

and

CD

RS

200,

200

E)2

Figure 2-9 One DBX Card Assembled onto MCP-IPx2 Card - Front View

1stDBX

MCP-IPx2

2Metalscrew(x2)

3Metalnut(x2)

1

Nylon screw andspacer type A

(x2)required

for 2nd DBXor CLA only

0

2-22 Main Control Processor Cards Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 95: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MC

P-IP

x2 C

ard

(Cor

al F

lexi

Com

200

, IPx

500

and

CD

RS

200,

200

E)2

Figure 2-10 Two DBX Cards Assembled onto MCP-IPx2 Card - Front View

1stDBX

MCP-IPx2

2

1 4Nylon screw(x2)

Nylon screw(x2)

Nylonspacertype A(x2)

1

3

2ndDBX

Main Control Card Installation Manual Main Control Processor Cards 2-23

Page 96: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MC

P-IP

x2 C

ard

(Cor

al F

lexi

Com

200

, IPx

500

and

CD

RS

200,

200

E)2

Figure 2-11 Layout of DBX Card Assembled onto an MCP-IPx2 Card

DBX/CLA Connector

DBM/WAD Connector

P11

P22

BUSCONTROLLER

CPU386EX

Mounting holesfor nylon screws and spacersfor 2nd DBX or CLA

Mounting holesfor metal screws

1st DBX

2-24 Main Control Processor Cards Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 97: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MC

P-IP

x2 C

ard

(Cor

al F

lexi

Com

200

, IPx

500

and

CD

RS

200,

200

E)2

Figure 2-12 Layout of 2 DBX Card Assembled onto an MCP-IPx2 Card

CPU386EX

Mounting holesfor nylon screws

2nd DBX

Main Control Card Installation Manual Main Control Processor Cards 2-25

Page 98: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MC

P-IP

x2 C

ard

(Cor

al F

lexi

Com

200

, IPx

500

and

CD

RS

200,

200

E)2

Figure 2-13 MCP-IPx2 Card with MAP - Front View

MAP

3

2

MCP-IPx2

1Nylon screw(x2)

Nylon spacertype B(x2)

1

2

2-26 Main Control Processor Cards Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 99: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MC

P-IP

x2 C

ard

(Cor

al F

lexi

Com

200

, IPx

500

and

CD

RS

200,

200

E)2

Figure 2-14 MCP-IPx2 with DBM and MAP - Front View

MCP-IPx2

MAPDBM

1 3

2

Nylon screw(x2)

Nylon spacertype A(x2)

1

Nylon spacertype B(x2)

2

Main Control Card Installation Manual Main Control Processor Cards 2-27

Page 100: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MC

P-IP

x2 C

ard

(Cor

al F

lexi

Com

200

, IPx

500

and

CD

RS

200,

200

E)2

Figure 2-15 MCP-IPx2 with DBM and CLA - Front View

MCP-IPx2

Nylon screw(x2)

CLADBM

1 3

2

Nylon screw(x2)

Nylon spacertype A(x2)

1

2-28 Main Control Processor Cards Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 101: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MC

P-IP

x2 C

ard

(Cor

al F

lexi

Com

200

, IPx

500

and

CD

RS

200,

200

E)2

Figure 2-16 MCP-IPx2 with CLA - Front View

3Nylon screw(x2)

CLA

2

MCP-IPx2

1Nylon screw(x2)

Nylon spacertype A(x2)

1

Main Control Card Installation Manual Main Control Processor Cards 2-29

Page 102: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MC

P-IP

x2 C

ard

(Cor

al F

lexi

Com

200

, IPx

500

and

CD

RS

200,

200

E)2

Figure 2-17 MCP-IPx2 with DBX and CLA - Front View

CLADBX

MCP-IPx2

2

73

5

1Nylon screw(x2)

6Nylon screw(x2)

Nylonspacertype A(x2)

1

Nylon screw(x2)

Nylon screw(x2)

Nylon spacertype B(x2)

4Nylon spacertype A(x2)

3

2-30 Main Control Processor Cards Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 103: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MC

P-IP

x2 C

ard

(Cor

al F

lexi

Com

200

, IPx

500

and

CD

RS

200,

200

E)2

Figure 2-18 MCP-IPx2 with DBX and MAP - Front View

MAPDBX

MCP-IPx2

2

73

5

1Nylon screw(x2)

6Nylon screw(x2)

Nylonlspacertype A(x2)

1

Nylon screw(x2)

Nylon screw(x2)

Nylon spacertype B(x2)

4Nylon spacertype A(x2)

3

Main Control Card Installation Manual Main Control Processor Cards 2-31

Page 104: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MC

P-IP

x2 C

ard

(Cor

al F

lexi

Com

200

, IPx

500

and

CD

RS

200,

200

E)2

Figure 2-19 Layout of DBM and MAP Card Assembled onto an MCP-IPx2 Card

Mounting holesfor plastic screws for connectingMCP-IPx2 to to MAP card

MCP-IPx2

MAP + DBM

MAP only

Mounting holes for metalscrews for connectingMCP-IPx2 to DBM card

MCP-IPx2Lower

MAP upper

DBM below MAP

2-32 Main Control Processor Cards Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 105: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MC

P-IP

x2 C

ard

(Cor

al F

lexi

Com

200

, IPx

500

and

CD

RS

200,

200

E)2

Figure 2-20 MCP-IPx2 Card with CLA and DBM - Layout

CompactFlash Disk

(CFD)memory

F-C

LA

Mounting holes fornylon screws for

connecting to MCP-IPx2

DBM cardbelow CLA

MCP-IPx2 Lower

CLA Upper

DBM cardbelow CLA

Main Control Card Installation Manual Main Control Processor Cards 2-33

Page 106: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MC

P-IP

x2 C

ard

(Cor

al F

lexi

Com

200

, IPx

500

and

CD

RS

200,

200

E)2

Figure 2-21 MCP-IPx2 Card with CLA and DBX - Layout

CompactFlash Disk

(CFD)memory

F-CLA

Mounting holes for nylon screwsfor connecting to

MCP-IPx2

Mounting holes for nylon screwsfor connecting to DBX

DBX cardbelow CLA

DBX cardbelow CLA

MCP-IPx2 Lower

CLA Upper

2-34 Main Control Processor Cards Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 107: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MC

P-IP

x2 C

ard

(Cor

al F

lexi

Com

200

, IPx

500

and

CD

RS

200,

200

E)2

Figure 2-22 MCP-IPx2 Card with MAP and DBX - Layout

Mounting holesfor plastic screws for connectingMCP-IPx2 to MAP card

MCP-IPx2

MCP-IPx2Lower

MAP upper

DBX below MAP

Mounting holesfor nylon screws and spacersfor 2nd DBX or MAP

Main Control Card Installation Manual Main Control Processor Cards 2-35

Page 108: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MC

P-IP

x2 C

ard

(Cor

al F

lexi

Com

200

, IPx

500

and

CD

RS

200,

200

E)2

.................................................................................. Specifications - MCP-IPx2

Microprocessor:.......................................... Intel™ 80386EX

CPU Clock Rate: ........................................ 32 MHz

Memory Addressing:.................................. 32 MB for Coral version 15 or higher16 MB for Coral version 14 or lower

Data Bus Structure: .................................... 16 Bit; Shared with DBM1, DBX, MAP, CLA, flash and MSBipx/MSBsl

RAM Storage Capacity: ............................. 2 MB with battery backup (90 days typically)Up to 15MB when DBM is installedUp to 2MB when DBX is installed

RAM Backup Battery

LF1/2W, 2430, 2430B

Voltage........................................................ 3.0 VDC Nom.

Capacity...................................................... 250 mA/H

Dimensions:

Diameter .............................................. 0.965 in. (24.5 mm)

Width ................................................... 0.118 in. (3 mm)

NEDA Equivalent ............................... 5011L

KB0

RS-232E

Connector ................................................... DB-9S

Baud rate .................................................... 300 bps to 115,200 bps

Parity .......................................................... None, Odd, Even

Number of bits............................................ 7, 8

Stop bit ....................................................... 1

Default........................................................ 9600 bps, No parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, VT-100

1. DBM requires Coral version 15 or higher.

2-36 Main Control Processor Cards Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 109: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MC

P-IP

x2 C

ard

(Cor

al F

lexi

Com

200

, IPx

500

and

CD

RS

200,

200

E)2

LAN Interface Unit (LIU)

Baud rate .................................................... 300 bps to 115,200 bps

Parity .......................................................... None, Odd, Even

Number of bits............................................ 7, 8

Stop bit ....................................................... 1

Default........................................................ 9600 bps, No parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop

Ethernet Standard ....................................... 10Base-T

Coral Version

13 or lower: ................................................ No

14:............................................................... Yes (with DBX)

15 or higher: ............................................... Yes (with DBM/DBX)

Main Control Card Installation Manual Main Control Processor Cards 2-37

Page 110: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

NOTES:

Page 111: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

M

2.2

ain Control Card Installation M

MEX-IP2 Card(Coral FlexiCom 300,400,5000 and Coral IPx 800,3000)

MEX

-IP2

Car

d (C

oral

Fle

xiC

om 3

00,4

00,5

000

and

Cor

al IP

x 80

0,30

00)

2

.................................................................................. General Description

This section describes the features and functions of the MEX-IP2 main control

processor card.

The MEX-IP2 control processor card is installed in the following systems:

Coral FlexiCom 300, 400V, 400, 5000

Coral IPx 800, 3000

The MEX-IP2 card (see Figure 2-23) provides RS-232E programming and

maintenance interface, Software Authorization Unit (SAU), and flash interface. The

MEX-IP2 contains multi-pin connectors and support circuitry for the addition of MAP,

CLA, DBM, DBX, and LIU daughterboards. It integrates the main processor, memory

management circuitry, local bus interface, real-time clock, generic feature software

memory, and database memory. The MEX-IP2 supervises overall system operation by

executing system-wide processes. These processes include port connection

management, feature management, generic feature software installation, feature

authorization, configuration database management, database backup and restoration,

program interface input/output and diagnostic testing.

Inserting or removing the MEX-IP2 control card when power is applied could damage

the card. Before inserting or removing the MEX-IP2 control card, verify that the power

supply card switch is turned off.

anual Main Control Processor Cards 2-39

Page 112: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MEX

-IP2

Car

d (C

oral

Fle

xiC

om 3

00,4

00,5

000

and

Cor

al IP

x 80

0,30

00)

2

Figure 2-23 MEX-IP2 Card

Front Right Side

IMC8,16Flash memory card

(Software & Database)

RE

MO

VE

BE

FO

RE

US

E

RESET

MEX-IP2

Database MemoryBackup Battery

P3

LAN

SAU

1st DBX/ 4th DBX/

CLA / MAPConnector

2nd DBX/ 3rd DBX

Connector

DBM / MAPConnector

P1

P2

IMC8/16Release

button

IMC8/16drive

KB0

2-40 Main Control Processor Cards Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 113: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MEX

-IP2

Car

d (C

oral

Fle

xiC

om 3

00,4

00,5

000

and

Cor

al IP

x 80

0,30

00)

2

Port Management

In order to manage port connections and feature operation, the main processor

communicates through the:

HDC card in the IPx 800 and FlexiCom 400 systems

4GC card in the IPx 3000 and FlexiCom 5000 systems

16GC circuits embedded on the MCB Office card of the main IPx Office unit,

and on the backplane of the IPx 500M

Communication is facilitated via the HDLC buses, with the local card processors on

each peripheral card both in the main and in the expansion cabinet(s). The main

processor receives status messages from the card processors regarding port activity. It

determines the appropriate response based on the programming entries contained in

the system database. The main processor then instructs the appropriate card processor

as to what action to take with each port.

Memory Management

All system memory resides on the MEX-IP2 card. The 2MB Static Random Access

Memory (SRAM) is located directly on the MEX-IP2 card. The MEX-IP2 also acts as

a mother card to MAP, CLA, DBM, DBX, and LIU daughterboards. The DBM card

contains 2, 4, or 8 MB of memory. The DBX card includes 1MB of SRAM.

Flash memory, located on the flash card, stores the generic feature software, which

determines the operation of the system. RAM, both on the MEX-IP2 and on the DBM

or DBX expansion cards, stores the system configuration database, and is used as a run

memory for general purposes. The flash card also stores a copy of the configuration

database.

Database memory and real-time clock functions in the Coral system are protected

from power loss by long-life lithium backup batteries. A battery is installed on the

MEX-IP2 card; it supplies both the MEX-IP2 and the DBM card with backup power.

A monitoring circuit on the MEX-IP2 and DBX card (not on the DBM card)

constantly measures the voltage level of its battery. It signals the main processor when

the remaining energy stored in any battery approaches the point that it can no longer

provide sufficient power to maintain the memory circuitry.

If the DBM card is separated from the MEX-IP2 card, all of the stored information on the

DBM card is lost.

Main Control Card Installation Manual Main Control Processor Cards 2-41

Page 114: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MEX

-IP2

Car

d (C

oral

Fle

xiC

om 3

00,4

00,5

000

and

Cor

al IP

x 80

0,30

00)

2

The generic feature software and feature authorization information is installed and

updated into the flash card, using the FMprog PC-utility. Similarly, the system

database is regularly backed up to, and may be transferred and restored from, an

IMC4 IMC8 / IMC16 card inserted in the flash memory card drive.

The Program Interface Facility

The PI (Program Interface) and CoralVIEW CVA/CVD provides a text-based facility

for reviewing and changing the system configuration and database. It enables the

performance and monitoring of diagnostic routines. The PI can be accessed via a

simple data terminal, a personal computer, or via the LAN if a MAP or an LIU card is

installed.

The PI and CoralVIEW CVA/CVD/CVT can be accessed via:

RS-232E data terminal port (KB0) provided on the MEX-IP2 front panel. See

Figure 2-24.

RJ-45 LAN port provided on the MEX-IP2 front panel via the LAN when an

LIU card is “FRONT” attached. See Figure 2-24.

RJ-45 LAN port provided on the IPx 800, 3000 rear panel, via the LAN when

an LIU card is “REAR” attached. See Figure 2-29 and Figure 2-30.

RJ-45 LAN port provided on the MAP front panel via the LAN when a MAP

card is attached. See Figure 2-25.

Do not remove the IMC4 / IMC8 / IMC16 card from its drive during system operation.

Doing so while the system is ON AIR will cause the system to shut down.

2-42 Main Control Processor Cards Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 115: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MEX

-IP2

Car

d (C

oral

Fle

xiC

om 3

00,4

00,5

000

and

Cor

al IP

x 80

0,30

00)

2

.................................................................................. Front Panel Features

Figure 2-24 illustrates the front panel of the MEX-IP2 card. The front panel contains

various elements. Table 2-8 displays the various MEX-IP2 functions.

Figure 2-24 MEX-IP2 Card Front Panel

7-Segment Status Display

5VDC Indicator (Green)

Flash memory cardRelease Button

IMC8,16 (Software and Database) Flash memory card

Software AuthorizationUnit (SAU) Connector

Reset CPU Pushbutton

Expansion Panel For CLA or MAPApplication cards

LAN Indicator (Green)

RJ-45 Network Interface Connection

Option DIP Switches2-8 Always Set to the Right1 Set to the Left for LAN Connections Only

KB0 RS-232E Serial Programming Port Interface

Set DIP Switch# 1 to theRight for PI-KB0 Connections

RESET

MEX-IP2

LAN

SAU

KB0

Watchdog indicator (Red)

Set DIP Switch# 1 to the Leftfor PI-LAN (LIU) Connections

Expansionpanel screws

(LIU)

Main Control Card Installation Manual Main Control Processor Cards 2-43

Page 116: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MEX

-IP2

Car

d (C

oral

Fle

xiC

om 3

00,4

00,5

000

and

Cor

al IP

x 80

0,30

00)

2

Figure 2-25 MEX-IP2 Front Panel with MAP Installed MEX-IP2

LAN

SAU

Reset MAPPushbutton

RJ-45NetworkInterface

MaintenancePort

CoraLINKMAP CardStatusIndicator

7-Segment Status Display

5VDC Indicator (Green)

Flash card Release Button

IMC8,16 Software and DatabaseFlash memory card

Software AuthorizationUnit (SAU) Connector

Reset CPU Push-button

LAN Indicator (Green)

RJ-45 Network Interface Connection (LIU)

Option DIP Switches2-8 Always Set to the Right1 Set to the Left for LAN Connections Only

KB0 RS-232E Serial Programming Port Interface

Set DIP Switch# 1 to theRight for KB0 Connections

RESET

KB0

Watchdog Indicator (Red)

MAP

RST

COM

LAN

2-44 Main Control Processor Cards Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 117: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MEX

-IP2

Car

d (C

oral

Fle

xiC

om 3

00,4

00,5

000

and

Cor

al IP

x 80

0,30

00)

2

Figure 2-26 MEX-IP2 Front Panel with CLA Installed

MEX-IP2

LAN

SAU

Reset CLAPushbutton

RJ-45NetworkInterface

MaintenancePort

CoraLINKCLA CardStatusIndicator

7-Segment Status Display

5VDC Indicator (Green)

Flash card Release Button

IMC8,16 Software and DatabaseFlash memory card

Software AuthorizationUnit (SAU) Connector

Reset CPU Push-button

LAN Indicator (Green)

RJ-45 Network Interface Connection (LIU)

Option DIP Switches2-8 Always Set to the Right1 Set to the Left for LAN Connections Only

KB0 RS-232E Serial Programming Port Interface

Set DIP Switch# 1 to theRight for KB0 Connections

RESET

SAU

RST

LED

CO

M 1

RST

CO

M 1

FCLACORALINK

LINE10/100BASET

KB0

Watchdog Indicator (Red)

Main Control Card Installation Manual Main Control Processor Cards 2-45

Page 118: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MEX

-IP2

Car

d (C

oral

Fle

xiC

om 3

00,4

00,5

000

and

Cor

al IP

x 80

0,30

00)

2

Table 2-8 MEX-IP2 Control Card Functions

Function What is it for?

7-Segment Status Display

Used for alarms and diagnostic functions. A full list of possible displays is provided later on in this chapter. See Table 2-9 on page 2-48.The Green LED 7-Segment display is lit to indicate normal system operation and 5V power is functional.

LAN LED indicator (green)

Lit when DIP switch #1 is switched to the left and an LIU card is installed, indicating that the PI is accessed via the LAN.

Option DIP switches

All switches should be set to OFF (right) so that the system will respond after a power failure. DIP switch #1 is switched to the left for LAN connection. In this case, all interaction with the PI is carried via the LAN and not via the KB0 RS-232E port.

Watchdog Indicator (red)

For the manufacturer’s use, only. If this red LED indicator is lit, switch DIP switch #8 to the right.

KB0 Port Data Terminal Port, DTE Interface, used to connect an RS-232E serial cable, providing access to the PI or CoralVIEW CVA/CVD/CVT.Default configuration:9600 bps, No parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, VT-100. See KB0 RS-232E Programing Port, page 2-49.

CPU Reset Pushbutton

Forces the Coral system to restart. Used to partially initialize the system (cause a warm restart procedure), simulating the procedure that occurs automatically when power is applied to the system.Forcing initialization by pressing reset immediately disconnects all calls in progress but does not set the database to default. However, resetting the main processor while the database is being programmed (P on the 7-segment display) may corrupt the database. If this happens, the database must be restored.CAUTIONPressing this button will cause partial initialization and drop all calls.Additionally, all keyset call logs will be cleared.

Flash Card Release Button

Used to release the flash memory card. See Chapter 4, Flash Memory Card.

Flash Memory Card

Used to save and restore the database as well as to store the Generic feature software.CAUTIONInserting or removing this card while the MEX-IP2 card is powered could result in damage to the card.Inserting or removing this card will cause a partial initialization. All calls in progress will be terminated.

LAN Port RJ-45, LAN connector located on the front panel of the card. This connector is used to interface the PI via the LAN when an LIU card is supplied and DIP switch #1 is switched to the left. When these conditions are met, the green LED indicator is lit.

SAU Connector The Software Authorization Unit is attached here. See Software Authorization Unit (SAU), page 5-1

2-46 Main Control Processor Cards Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 119: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MEX

-IP2

Car

d (C

oral

Fle

xiC

om 3

00,4

00,5

000

and

Cor

al IP

x 80

0,30

00)

2

MEX-IP2 Status Display Codes

The MEX-IP2 numeric status display indicates various operating and error states of

the Coral system, and can provide valuable information to assist in the maintenance of

the system. Table 2-9 lists the various status indications and their meaning.

A “.” (dot) appears during normal system operation.

A "0" appears on the status display whenever the system is off-line for maintenance

testing, or to install or update the generic software.

A "b" in the status display indicates that a backup battery on the MEX-IP2 or on a

DBX card no longer has sufficient energy to maintain the memory circuitry if system

power is lost. Each time a programming session is started from the PI, any faulty

battery is identified. The system database should be saved as soon as possible to an

IMC8 / IMC16 unit, and the faulty battery must be replaced as soon as the system can

be shut down, to ensure continued system reliability.

An "E" indicates that the main processor has been interrupted to prevent database

corruption during a power fluctuation. This condition should clear itself momentarily.

An “L” indicates that the SAU cannot be detected at the SAU port on the front panel

of the MEX-IP2. Generally, this indicates that:

The device is no longer present or is not securely fastened to the MEX-IP2.

There is a mismatch between the number of the SAU device installed on the

card and the number of the SAU key.

A “P” appears during software backup.

All other error status indications generally indicate a more serious problem, and are

likely to be accompanied by considerable system malfunction. If an error indication

does not appear to affect system operation, save the database to DB0.DEF

immediately. For further details, see Saving to the Flash Card, page 4-14. When the

system can be restarted without disrupting service, press the reset pushbutton on the

front panel of the MEX-IP2.

Do not remove the IMC flash memory card from the MEX-IP2, push reset, or switch

power OFF when “P” is illuminated. Doing so might damage the IMC data.

Main Control Card Installation Manual Main Control Processor Cards 2-47

Page 120: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MEX

-IP2

Car

d (C

oral

Fle

xiC

om 3

00,4

00,5

000

and

Cor

al IP

x 80

0,30

00)

2

Table 2-9 lists the MEX-IP2 card status display codes and their meaning.

Table 2-9 MEX-IP2 Status Display Codes

Pressing Reset pushbutton interrupts all calls in progress and causes the system to

initialize, possibly discarding the database information stored in the database memory

and reloading the database from IMC8/IMC16. Additionally, all keyset call logs will be

cleared.

Status Display System Status

. Normal System Operation

0 Off-Line Monitor/Diagnostics Mode

8 Appears briefly during powerup before other numbers

1,2,3,4,5,6 Appear Briefly During Initialization

b Lithium Backup Battery (MEX-IP2 or DBX) Low

C Flash Memory (IMC8) Checksum Error

E Map RAM, Coding PROM, or Memory Configuration Error

F AC Fail Active (System halted due to power fluctuation)

L The Software Authorization Unit (SAU) cannot be detected at the SAU port on the front panel of the MEX-IP2. Generally, this indicates that: The device is no longer present or is not securely fastened

to the MEX-IP2. There is a mismatch between the number of the SAU device

installed on the card and the number of the SAU key.CAUTIONIf the SAU is removed from the MEX-IP2, the Coral system automatically ceases call processing after 14 days. Relevant messages appear on the PI, warning that the system will not operate without the proper SAU.See Software Authorization Management, page 5-1 for details.

P Programming the flash memory during software backup

2-48 Main Control Processor Cards Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 121: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MEX

-IP2

Car

d (C

oral

Fle

xiC

om 3

00,4

00,5

000

and

Cor

al IP

x 80

0,30

00)

2

KB0 RS-232E Programing Port

The serial interface of the KB0 programming port on the MEX-IP2 conforms to the

EIA RS-232E specification. It is wired as a Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) device

using a popular 9-pin, female, D-type connector. The interface allows connection of a

common, asynchronous, ASCII data terminal, personal computer or external modem

for programming the various features of the Coral system and monitoring diagnostic

information.

Figure 2-27 illustrates the pin assignments of the DB-9S connector. Table 2-10 lists

the pin functions. See Chapter 2 of the relevant Installation Procedure and Hardware

Reference Procedure for detailed connection information and terminal setup.

Table 2-10 MEX-IP2 KB0 RS-232E Interface Pin Functions

Figure 2-27 MEX-IP2 KB0 Pin Assignment

KB0 SetupThe baud rate is set during first initialization at 9600 bps, No parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop

bit, VT-100. The baud rate can be set from 300 bps to 115,200 bps. Refer to the

Program Interface Reference Manual (Chapter-17 Terminal Setup - Route: TERM,0)

for instructions on the database programming required.

Pin Designation Pin # Function

Receive Data 2 Input to MEX-IP2

Transmit Data 3 Output from MEX-IP2

Data Terminal Ready 4 Output from MEX-IP2

Signal Ground 5 Signal return

Data Set Ready 6 Input to MEX-IP2

Request to Send 7 Output from MEX-IP2

Clear to Send 8 Input to MEX-IP2

4 - DATA TERMINAL READY

2 - RECEIVE DATA

3 - TRANSMIT DATA

5 - SIGNAL GROUND

CLEAR TO SEND - 8

REQUEST TO SEND - 7

DATA SET READY - 6

1 - N.C.

CLEAR TO SEND - 8

N.C. - 9

Main Control Card Installation Manual Main Control Processor Cards 2-49

Page 122: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MEX

-IP2

Car

d (C

oral

Fle

xiC

om 3

00,4

00,5

000

and

Cor

al IP

x 80

0,30

00)

2

RJ-45 LAN Port (LIU)

The RJ-45 LAN port enables PI programming the various features of the Coral system

and monitoring diagnostic information via the LAN and is identical in setup to the

KB0 connection. In order for the RJ-45 LAN port to be used, an LIU card must be

installed on the MEX-IP2 main control processor card on the front or rear panel. The

LIU card translates the protocol used by the KB0 connector to the protocol used by the

LAN. See Chapter 7, LAN Interface Unit (LIU).

RJ-45 LAN Port SetupThe baud rate is set during first initialization at 9600 bps, No parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop

bit, VT-100. The baud rate can be set from 300 bps to 115,200 bps. Refer to the

Program Interface Reference Manual (Chapter-17 Terminal Setup - Route: TERM,0)

for instructions on the database programming required.

The following table shows the interface connections of the pins on the LIU RJ-45

connectors.

Table 2-11 MEX-IP2 RJ-45 Interface Connection

Figure 2-28 MEX-IP2 RJ-45 Interface Connector PIN Assignment

Rear Panel LIU Connector (for IPx 800 and IPx 3000 Systems)

The IPx 800 and IPx 3000 cages include an RJ-45 port on the rear panel of the cage

marked LIU. This port is used as an alternative connection to the RJ-45 LAN port on

the front panel of the MEX-IP2 card. The LIU card must be installed onto the

MEX-IP2 card on the connectors marked LIU REAR in order for this port to be

functional. See Figure 2-29 and Figure 2-30.

Pin # Function

Pin 1 Tx(+)

Pin 2 Tx(-)

Pin 3 Rx(+)

Pin 4 not used

Pin 5 not used

Pin 6 Rx(-)

Pin 7 not used

Pin 8 not used

8

1

RJ-45

2-50 Main Control Processor Cards Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 123: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MEX

-IP2

Car

d (C

oral

Fle

xiC

om 3

00,4

00,5

000

and

Cor

al IP

x 80

0,30

00)

2

Figure 2-29 LIU Port on IPx 800M Rear Panel

Figure 2-30 LIU Port on IPx 3000M Rear Panel

Software Authorization Unit

The Software Authorization Unit (SAU) enables a set of permissions and feature

authorizations associated with its unique identification number. The Coral software

detects and verifies the permission settings of the SAU on the Control card (MEX-IP2)

enabling the system to function properly. For more information, see Chapter 5,

Software Authorization Unit (SAU).

LIU(RJ-45 LAN)

rear panelport

LIU(RJ-45 LAN)

rear panelport

Main Control Card Installation Manual Main Control Processor Cards 2-51

Page 124: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MEX

-IP2

Car

d (C

oral

Fle

xiC

om 3

00,4

00,5

000

and

Cor

al IP

x 80

0,30

00)

2

.................................................................................. Card Layout

The component side of the MEX-IP2 card includes the following components, as

described in Figure 2-31 and Table 2-12.

Figure 2-31 MEX-IP2 Card Layout

BATTERY INSULATOR(PULL AS SHOWN

TO REMOVE)

IMC8,16 Card(Software & DatabaseFlash memory card)

RE

MO

VE

BE

FO

RE

US

E

Database MemoryBackup Battery

LIU Rear

LIU Front

DBM / MAPConnector

P1

P2

P3

1st DBX/ 4th DBX/

CLA / MAPConnector

2nd DBX/ 3rd DBX

Connector

2-52 Main Control Processor Cards Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 125: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MEX

-IP2

Car

d (C

oral

Fle

xiC

om 3

00,4

00,5

000

and

Cor

al IP

x 80

0,30

00)

2

Table 2-12 MEX-IP2 Card Layout Features

Flash Memory Card Drive (for IMC8 and IMC16 cards)

The flash memory card slot houses an Integrated Memory Card with an 8MB flash

memory capacity (IMC8) or 16MB flash memory capacity (IMC16). For further

information, see Chapter 4, Flash Memory Cards IMC4(FMsl), IMC8, IMC16.

DBM Expansion Memory Card

The DBM card is a memory expansion card. The DBM card adds an additional 4 or

8 MB SRAM to the Coral system main control (version 15 and higher). The DBM card

is used to expand the storage capacity to the configuration database. The DBM

memory is protected by the lithium battery located on the MEX-IP2 card. This battery

continues to supply the SRAM when power to the Coral system is removed. The card

includes a connector on its top side, allowing for another memory or application card

to be connected. For further information, see Chapter 3, Expansion Memory Cards.

DBX Expansion Memory Card

The DBX card is a memory expansion card. The DBX card adds additional 1MB

SRAM storage to the Coral system main control. The card is equipped with an

extension connector on its top side, allowing for another expansion memory or

application card to be connected on top of it. The card also contains a long-life,

replaceable lithium energy cell which continues to supply power to the SRAM when

power to the Coral system is removed. A battery monitoring circuit produces a system

alarm when the energy level in a lithium cell drops below a reliable level. For further

information, see Chapter 3, Expansion Memory Cards.

Feature What is it for?

P1 Connector For attaching 1st and 4th DBX cards, and MAP or CLA cards

P3 Connector For attaching 2nd and 3rd DBX cards

P2 Connector For attaching up to two DBM cards or one DBM and one MAP or CLA card

Flash Drive For housing IMC4 / IMC8 / IMC16 flash memory card

LIU (front) connector For attaching the LIU card

LIU (rear) connector For attaching the LIU card

Backup Battery For supporting memory during power failure

Main Control Card Installation Manual Main Control Processor Cards 2-53

Page 126: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MEX

-IP2

Car

d (C

oral

Fle

xiC

om 3

00,4

00,5

000

and

Cor

al IP

x 80

0,30

00)

2

Application Card (MAP and CLA)

The MAP or CLA card may be installed for specific applications requiring either a

MAP or a CLA card. For more information, see Chapter 6, Application Cards.

LIU Connector

The LAN Interface Unit (LIU) is a daughterboard that enables the MEX-IP2 to

perform maintenance from the RJ-45 LAN connector. This card is redundant when a

MAP card is attached to the MEX-IP2.

The LIU card can be installed on the component side of the card in one of two

positions:

LIU front position is used when the LAN connection is made from the front

panel of a Coral unit (as is possible from all Coral units).

LIU rear position is used when the LAN connection is made from the rear

panel of the Coral unit (in IPx 800 and 3000 systems).

For more information, see Chapter 7, LAN Interface Unit (LIU).

Backup Battery

A new lithium battery can maintain power to the MEX-IP2 and DBM memory

circuitry and real-time clock for approximately 90 days. The battery is not recharged

by the system power. Thus, if the battery has powered the memory and real-time clock

for an extended period and near depletion is suspected, the contents of the memory

must be backed up, and the battery must be replaced. The internal diagnostic

procedure will cause a “b” to appear on the 7-segment display of the MEX-IP2 front

panel, indicating that the battery should be replaced. The backup battery includes an

insulator that is removed before inserting the card into its slot. Figure 2-31 identifies

the location of the battery holder and illustrates the insulator removal.

Testing the Backup BatteryThe battery voltage, tested under load, can be used to determine its state of charge.

Voltage measured across an unused battery connected to the memory circuitry should

fall between 3.30 and 3.35 volts. If the voltage measured across a battery is less than

2.50 volts, the battery must be replaced.

For first time use, release the protective battery insulator. See Figure 2-31.

2-54 Main Control Processor Cards Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 127: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MEX

-IP2

Car

d (C

oral

Fle

xiC

om 3

00,4

00,5

000

and

Cor

al IP

x 80

0,30

00)

2

Replacing the Lithium Battery1 Carefully lift the battery with your thumbnail.

2 Insert the new battery with the + (positive) symbol appearing on top.

Do not use any metal tool to release or insert the battery. Doing so could result in a

short circuit and damage the battery.

Explosion and Environmental Hazards.

There is a danger of explosion if the battery is replaced incorrectly. Replace the battery

only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.

Dispose of used batteries according to requirements specified by the battery

manufacturer and/or local regulatory agencies.

Main Control Card Installation Manual Main Control Processor Cards 2-55

Page 128: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MEX

-IP2

Car

d (C

oral

Fle

xiC

om 3

00,4

00,5

000

and

Cor

al IP

x 80

0,30

00)

2

.................................................................................. Inserting the MEX-IP2 Card into its Slot

The MEX-IP2 card is installed in a reserved slot. For further information, see Control

Card Location in Coral System, page 1-21.

1 Verify that the power to the main Coral unit is removed.

2 Turn off the power supply card switch in the main unit.

3 If a Coral IPx 800, 3000, or FlexiCom 5000 system is being installed, verify

that power to any expansion units is removed.

4 Carefully remove the protective battery insulator from under the top contact of

the lithium battery holder on the MEX-IP2 card. See Figure 2-3.

5 Verify that the DIP switches on the front panel of the MEX-IP2 card are set as

follows (see Figure 2-24):

DIP switches 1 set to the left for LIU connections, only

DIP switches 2-8 set to the right for everything else

6 If DBX cards are installed on the MEX-IP2, carefully remove the protective

battery insulator from under the top contact of the lithium battery holder on the

DBX card. See Figure 3-3 on page 3-10.

7 Insert the MEX-IP2 card fully into its card slot.

Do not insert or remove the control card while the Coral is powered. Sudden power

surges could damage system components. Verify that the power switch is turned off and

the AC power cord is disconnected.

2-56 Main Control Processor Cards Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 129: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MEX

-IP2

Car

d (C

oral

Fle

xiC

om 3

00,4

00,5

000

and

Cor

al IP

x 80

0,30

00)

2

.................................................................................. Removing the MEX-IP2 Card

1 Perform the Database Binary Backup procedure.

2 Verify that the numeric status display on the main control processor card does

NOT read “P”. When “P” is illuminated on the numeric status display, data is

being written to the flash card.

3 Turn off the power supply card switch in the main unit.

4 If a Coral IPx 800, 3000, or FlexiCom 5000 system is being installed, turn the

power supply of all expansion cages OFF.

5 Remove the MEX-IP2 control card from the main Coral unit.

Before removing a MEX-IP2 card from the Coral system, do the following:

1.Perform the Database Binary Backup procedure.

2.Verify that the database is not being backed up: check that the main control card

numeric status display does not read “P”. Data will be lost if power is removed from

the system when “P” is illuminated.

3.Turn the Coral power supply OFF. The flash card could be damaged if the MEX-IP2

card is removed when the system is powered.

Main Control Card Installation Manual Main Control Processor Cards 2-57

Page 130: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MEX

-IP2

Car

d (C

oral

Fle

xiC

om 3

00,4

00,5

000

and

Cor

al IP

x 80

0,30

00)

2

.................................................................................. Daughterboard Configurations

Figure 2-32 through Figure 2-47 displays the different possible assembly

configurations of daughterboards onto the MCP-IPx2 as summarized in Table 2-13.

Table 2-13 MEX-IP2 Daughterboard Assembly Configurations

LevelSee Figures

1 2

DBM — Figure 2-32 and Figure 2-34

DBX Figure 2-36 and Figure 2-38

MAP — Figure 2-39, Figure 2-40, and Figure 2-45

CLA — Figure 2-35

DBM DBM Figure 2-33 and Figure 2-34

DBM MAP Figure 2-40, Figure 2-41, and Figure 2-45

DBX DBX Figure 2-37 and Figure 2-38

DBX CLA Figure 2-43 and Figure 2-47

DBX MAP Figure 2-40, Figure 2-44, and Figure 2-45

DBM CLA Figure 2-42 and Figure 2-46

Once the system database has been installed, the position of the daughterboards

(upper and lower) must not be changed. Doing so will cause the Coral system to

malfunction.

2-58 Main Control Processor Cards Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 131: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MEX

-IP2

Car

d (C

oral

Fle

xiC

om 3

00,4

00,5

000

and

Cor

al IP

x 80

0,30

00)

2

Figure 2-32 One DBM Card Assembled onto an MEX-IP2 Card - Top View

MEX-IP2

DBM

Metalspacertype A(x3)

Metal screwand washer

(x1)

Metal screwand washer

(x2)

Metal screwand washer(x2)

Metal screwand washer(x1)

2

2 5

1

1

4

3

Main Control Card Installation Manual Main Control Processor Cards 2-59

Page 132: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MEX

-IP2

Car

d (C

oral

Fle

xiC

om 3

00,4

00,5

000

and

Cor

al IP

x 80

0,30

00)

2

Figure 2-33 Two DBM Cards Assembled onto an MEX-IP2 Card - Top View

MEX-IP2

DBM

Metalspacertype A(x3)

Metal screwand washer

(x1)

Metal screwand washer

(x2)

Metal screwand washer(x2)

Metal screwand washer(x1)

DBM

2

1

1

2

Metalspacertype B(x3)

4

5

7

8

63

2-60 Main Control Processor Cards Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 133: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MEX

-IP2

Car

d (C

oral

Fle

xiC

om 3

00,4

00,5

000

and

Cor

al IP

x 80

0,30

00)

2

Figure 2-34 Layout of DBM Card Assembled onto MEX-IP2

3

IMC8,16 Card(Software & DatabaseFlash Memory Card)

BATTERY INSULATOR(PULL AS SHOWN

TO REMOVE)

RE

MO

VE

BE

FO

RE

US

E

RESET

MEX-IP2

Database MemoryBackup Battery

LIU Rear

LIU Front

DBM/WADConnector

P1

P2

P3

LAN

SAU

1st DBX/ 4th DBX/

CLAConnector

2nd DBX/ 3rd DBX

Connector

U24

U25

U26

U27 DB

M

KB0

Main Control Card Installation Manual Main Control Processor Cards 2-61

Page 134: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MEX

-IP2

Car

d (C

oral

Fle

xiC

om 3

00,4

00,5

000

and

Cor

al IP

x 80

0,30

00)

2

Figure 2-35 MEX-IP2 with CLA - Top View CLAMEX-IP2

Nylonspacertype A(x2)

1Nylon screw(x2)

3

Nylon screw(x2)

Nylon screw(x2)

Nylon screw(x2)

5

1

2

2

4

2-62 Main Control Processor Cards Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 135: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MEX

-IP2

Car

d (C

oral

Fle

xiC

om 3

00,4

00,5

000

and

Cor

al IP

x 80

0,30

00)

2

Figure 2-36 One DBX Card Assembled onto the P1 Connector of the MEX-IP2 Card - Top View

MEX-IP2

DBX

Nylon screw(x2)

Nylon screw(x2)

Nylonspacertype A (x2)

1

1

2

Main Control Card Installation Manual Main Control Processor Cards 2-63

Page 136: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MEX

-IP2

Car

d (C

oral

Fle

xiC

om 3

00,4

00,5

000

and

Cor

al IP

x 80

0,30

00)

2

Figure 2-37 Two DBX Cards Assembled onto the P1 Connector of the MEX-IP2 Card - Top View

MEX-IP2

1stDBX

Nylon screw(x2)

Nylonspacer

type A (x2)

4thDBX

Nylon screw(x2)

Nylonspacer

type B (x2)

1

1 3

2 4

5

2-64 Main Control Processor Cards Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 137: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MEX

-IP2

Car

d (C

oral

Fle

xiC

om 3

00,4

00,5

000

and

Cor

al IP

x 80

0,30

00)

2

Figure 2-38 Layout of DBX Cards Assembled onto an MEX-IP2 Card

IMC4,8,16 Card(Software & Database

Flash Memory)

BATTERY INSULATOR(PULL AS SHOWN

TO REMOVE)

RE

MO

VE

BE

FO

RE

US

E

RESET

MEX-IP2

LIU Rear

LIU Front

LAN

SAU

REMOVEBEFORE

USE

P1

REMOVEBEFORE

USE

1st and 4th DBX

P1

REMOVEBEFORE

USE

2nd and 3rd DBX

KB0

Main Control Card Installation Manual Main Control Processor Cards 2-65

Page 138: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MEX

-IP2

Car

d (C

oral

Fle

xiC

om 3

00,4

00,5

000

and

Cor

al IP

x 80

0,30

00)

2

Figure 2-39 MEX-IP2 with MAP - Top View MEX-IP2

MAP

Nylon screw(x2)

Nylon screw(x2)

Nylon screw(x2)

Nylon screw(x2)

Nylonspacertype A(x2)

Nylonspacertype A(x2)

Front Panel

3

3

41

2 5

1

2

2-66 Main Control Processor Cards Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 139: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MEX

-IP2

Car

d (C

oral

Fle

xiC

om 3

00,4

00,5

000

and

Cor

al IP

x 80

0,30

00)

2

Figure 2-40 Attaching the MAP Card onto a MEX-IP2 Card

RE

SE

TME

X-I

P2

LA

N

SA

U

KB

0

MA

P RS

T

CO

M

LAN

RE

SE

TME

X-I

P2

LA

N

SA

U

KB

0

A B

1Unfasten screwsA and B and remove panelfrom MEX-IP2

3Push connectorstogether, makingsure that the MAPpanel of the MEX-IP2panel

is in front

2Align holesC, D, E and Fwith the spacerson MEX-IP2

4Fasten cards withfour plasticscrews

RE

SE

TME

X-I

P2

LA

N

SA

U

MA

P RS

T

CO

M

LAN

RE

MO

VE

BE

FO

RE

US

E

P3

1st DBX/ 4th DBX/

CLAConnector

DBM/WADConnector

P1

P2LED

1 2 3

ON

4

C D

E F

MEX-IP2

MAP

Main Control Card Installation Manual Main Control Processor Cards 2-67

Page 140: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MEX

-IP2

Car

d (C

oral

Fle

xiC

om 3

00,4

00,5

000

and

Cor

al IP

x 80

0,30

00)

2

Figure 2-41 MEX-IP2 with DBM and MAP - Top View

MEX-IP2MAP

DBM

Metal screwand washer(x1)

Metal screwand washer(x2)

Metal screwand washer(x2)

Nylon screw(x2)

Nylon screw(x2)

Nylon screw(x2)

Nylon screw(x2)

Nylonspacertype A (x2)

Nylonspacertype A(x2)

Front Panel

Nylon spacertype B(x2)

Nylon spacertype B (x2)

2 3

1

1

2

4

6

5

5

7

2-68 Main Control Processor Cards Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 141: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MEX

-IP2

Car

d (C

oral

Fle

xiC

om 3

00,4

00,5

000

and

Cor

al IP

x 80

0,30

00)

2

Figure 2-42 MEX-IP2 with DBM and CLA - Top View MEX-IP2

CLA

DBM

Metal screwand washer(x1)

Metal screwand washer(x2)

Metal screwand washer(x2)

Nylon screw(x2)

Nylon screw(x2)

Nylon screw(x2)

Nylon screw(x2)

Nylonspacertype A (x2)

Nylonspacertype A (x2)

2

1

1

2

4

5

Main Control Card Installation Manual Main Control Processor Cards 2-69

Page 142: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MEX

-IP2

Car

d (C

oral

Fle

xiC

om 3

00,4

00,5

000

and

Cor

al IP

x 80

0,30

00)

2

Figure 2-43 MEX-IP2 with DBX and CLA - Top View MEX-IP2

CLA

DBX

Nylonspacertype A (x2)

Nylonspacertype A(x2)

Nylon screw(x2)

Nylon screw(x2)

Nylon screw(x2)

Nylon screw(x2)

Nylon spacertype B(x4)

Nylon spacertype B(x2)

1

1

2

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

2-70 Main Control Processor Cards Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 143: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MEX

-IP2

Car

d (C

oral

Fle

xiC

om 3

00,4

00,5

000

and

Cor

al IP

x 80

0,30

00)

2

Figure 2-44 MEX-IP2 with DBX and MAP - Top View MEX-IP2

DBX

Nylon screw(x2)

Nylonspacertype A (x2)

MAP

Nylon screw(x2)

Nylon screw(x2)

Nylon spacertype B(x2)

Nylonspacertype A(x2)

Nylon screw(x2)

1

2

1

2

3

5

4

6

7

Main Control Card Installation Manual Main Control Processor Cards 2-71

Page 144: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MEX

-IP2

Car

d (C

oral

Fle

xiC

om 3

00,4

00,5

000

and

Cor

al IP

x 80

0,30

00)

2

Figure 2-45 MEX-IP2 with MAP Card - Layout

RE

MO

VE

BE

FO

RE

US

E

P3

1st DBX/ 4th DBX/

CLAConnector

DBM/WADConnector

P2

J1

LED

1 2 3

ON

4

MEX-IP2

MAP

Mounting holesfor plastic screws

MAP when no othercard is installed

MAP when DBM orDBX is installed

2-72 Main Control Processor Cards Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 145: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MEX

-IP2

Car

d (C

oral

Fle

xiC

om 3

00,4

00,5

000

and

Cor

al IP

x 80

0,30

00)

2

Figure 2-46 MEX-IP2 Card with CLA and DBM - Layout

IMC4,8,16 Card(Software & Database

Flash Memory)

RE

MO

VE

BE

FO

RE

US

E

Database MemoryBackup Battery

LIU Rear

LIU Front

DBM/WADConnector

P1

P2

P3

DBM(under CLA)

1st DBX/ 4th DBX/

CLAConnector

2nd DBX/ 3rd DBX

Connector

Mounting holesfor nylon screws connecting to MEX-IP2

Main Control Card Installation Manual Main Control Processor Cards 2-73

Page 146: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MEX

-IP2

Car

d (C

oral

Fle

xiC

om 3

00,4

00,5

000

and

Cor

al IP

x 80

0,30

00)

2

Figure 2-47 MEX-IP2 Card with CLA and DBX - Layout

IMC4,8,16 Card(Software & Database

Flash Memory)

RE

MO

VE

BE

FO

RE

US

E

Database MemoryBackup Battery

LIU Rear

LIU Front

DBM/WADConnector

P1

P2

P3

DBX(under CLA)

1st DBX/ 4th DBX/

CLAConnector

2nd DBX/ 3rd DBX

Connector

Mounting holesfor nylon screws connecting to MEX-IP2

Spacer and screwbetween DBX and CLA

Spacer and screwbetween MEX-IP2 and CLA

2-74 Main Control Processor Cards Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 147: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MEX

-IP2

Car

d (C

oral

Fle

xiC

om 3

00,4

00,5

000

and

Cor

al IP

x 80

0,30

00)

2

.................................................................................. Specifications - MEX-IP2

Microprocessor:.......................................... IntelTM 80386EX

CPU Clock Rate: ........................................ 32 MHz

Memory Addressing:.................................. 32 MB

Data Bus Structure: .................................... 16 Bit; Shared with DBM1, DBX, flash, MAP or CLA and HDC/4GC

RAM Storage Capacity: ............................. 2 MB with battery backup (90 days typically)Up to 15MB when DBM is installedUp to 2MB when a DBX is installed

RAM Backup Battery

LF1/2W, 2430, 2430B

Voltage........................................................ 3.0 VDC Nom.

Capacity...................................................... 250 mA/H

Dimensions:

Diameter .............................................. 0.965 in. (24.5 mm)

Width ................................................... 0.118 in. (3 mm)

NEDA Equivalent ............................... 5011L

KB0

RS-232E

Connector ................................................... DB-9S

Baud rate .................................................... 300 bps to 115,200 bps

Parity .......................................................... None, Odd, Even

Number of bits............................................ 7, 8

Stop bit ....................................................... 1

Default........................................................ 9600 bps, No parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, VT-100

1. DBM requires Coral version 15 or higher.

Main Control Card Installation Manual Main Control Processor Cards 2-75

Page 148: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MEX

-IP2

Car

d (C

oral

Fle

xiC

om 3

00,4

00,5

000

and

Cor

al IP

x 80

0,30

00)

2

LAN Interface Unit (LIU)

Baud rate .................................................... 300 bps to 115,200 bps

Parity .......................................................... None, Odd, Even

Number of bits............................................ 7, 8

Stop bit ....................................................... 1

Default........................................................ 9600 bps, No parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop

Ethernet Standard ....................................... 10Base-T

Coral Version

13 or lower: ................................................ No

14:............................................................... Yes (with DBX)

15 or higher: ............................................... Yes (with DBM/DBX)

2-76 Main Control Processor Cards Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 149: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Control Card Installation Manual

Chapter

3

Expansion Memory Cards

3.1 DBM-2, DBM-4, and DBM-8 Module ....................................3-1

3.2 DBX Module..........................................................................3-9

Page 150: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document
Page 151: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

C

3.1

ontrol Card Installation Manua

DBM-2, DBM-4, and DBM-8 ModuleDatabase Expansion Memory Card

DBM

-2, D

BM-4

, and

DBM

-8 M

odul

e 3

.................................................................................. General Description

This section describes the DBM card, used by the MCP-IPx2, MEX-IP2 and

MCB Office control cards. See Figure 3-1. The DBM card requires Coral Software

version 15 or higher or any Coral Wave Gateway version.

Coral Components Discontinuation Announcement: DBM-2 has been discontinued. DBM-4 and DBM-8 cards replace the discontinued DBM-2 cards, which are no longer produced.

The DBM card is for use in the following control cards and systems:

Table 3-1 DBM cards, Coral Systems & Control Cards Compatibility

The DBM memory expansion card is a component of the Coral common control

section. The DBM card includes either 2MB, 4MB, or 8MB of Static Random Access

Memory (SRAM), used to store the configuration database of a Coral system. The

DBM card is an optional card that expands the database memory space. The

Control Card Type

CDRS Coral FlexiCom Coral IPx

200

*

200E

200

*

* Coral FlexiCom 200, 300, 400V and CDRS 200 systems can be installed with Coral Version 14.67 or lower.

300

*

400V

*

400

5000

500

800

3000

Off

ice

MCP-IPx — — — — — — — — — — —

MCP-IPx2 — — — — — — — — —

MEX-IP — — — — — — — — — — —

MEX-IP2 — — — — — — —

MSB Office — — — — — — — — — —

l Expansion Memory Cards 3-1

Page 152: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Dat

abas

e Ex

pans

ion

Mem

ory

Car

d 3

configuration database determines the individual characteristics of a particular

installation site. Figure 3-1 displays the DBM-2, DBM-4 and DBM-8 card layout. The

label at the bottom of the card that reads “DBM-2”, “DBM-4”, or “DBM-8”, indicates

that the DBM card is supplied with 2MB, 4MB, or 8 MB of memory (1 MB per chip),

respectively.

Up to two DBM cards can be mounted onto a main control processor card. The

maximum combined utilized memory of the main control processor card and the

mounted expansion cards does not exceed 15 MB. For example, an MCP-IPx2 card

with two DBM-8 cards includes a combined memory of 16 MB. Of this, only 15 MB

is utilized.

SRAM devices require a constant source of power to retain their contents. Power to

maintain the memory is ordinarily provided by the Coral system in which the DBM

card is installed. Backup voltage for the DBM is supplied by the lithium battery on the

main control processor card.

Figure 3-1 DBM-2, DBM-4, and DBM-8 Card Layout

Figure 3-2 DBM Card Lower Side

DBM-2

U24

P1 Connector

U25

DBM-4

U24 U25 U26 U27

DBM-8

U24

U28

U25

U29

U26

U30

U27

U31

P1 Connector P1 Connector

Connector J1

3-2 Expansion Memory Cards Control Card Installation Manual

Page 153: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Dat

abas

e Ex

pans

ion

Mem

ory

Car

d 3

The main control processor card contains an on-board lithium battery that provides

continuous power to the DBM memory circuitry during the absence of system power.

A battery monitor circuit signals the main processor when the remaining electrical

power stored in the lithium backup battery has exhausted to a level that can no longer

support the memory circuitry.

The DBM does not occupy a card slot within the Coral system unit. Rather, it is

installed as a baby card onto a memory interface connector on the main control

processor card. DBM cards are installed on connector:

P22 on the MCP-IPx2 card. See Figure 2-1 on page 2-2.

P2 on the MEX-IP2 card. See Figure 2-31 on page 2-52.

The DBM card is equipped with an extension connector on the top side that extends

the memory interface connector from the main control processor card, allowing for

another DBM or MAP card to be connected on top of it. The connector on the main

control card can support two DBM cards by stacking one memory card onto the

extension connector of another. When a DBM card is installed in the extension

connector of another DBM card, the memory card installed on the main control

processor card is referred to as the "lower” memory card, and the DBM installed on

the extension connector is referred to as the "upper" memory card.

The MAP, is either attached to a connector on the main control card or is “stacked” on

top of the DBM card at P1. If required, DBM may be installed as either the lower and

upper memory card. Up to two DBM cards, or one DBM card and one MAP card can

be installed on the main control processor card.

Most Coral systems do not require a DBM at all. Special applications may require a

single DBM, and rarely would any system configuration require more than one DBM

card.

Once the system database has been installed, the DBM is powered by a backup battery

positioned on the main control processor card. Removing the DBM cards

(“upper” and/or “lower”) from the main control processor card will cause data on the

DBM card to be lost. Doing so will cause the Coral system to malfunction.

Control Card Installation Manual Expansion Memory Cards 3-3

Page 154: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Dat

abas

e Ex

pans

ion

Mem

ory

Car

d 3

.................................................................................. When a DBM Card is Required

Coral IPx Office; CDRS 200E; IPx 500, 800 and FlexiCom 400

To use the Directory, Traffic, or Call Log features

Coral IPx 3000 and FlexiCom 5000

In large Coral Configurations with 5000 or more ports

To use the Coral Directory, Traffic, or Call Log features

In IPx 3000 systems equipped with dual IPx 3000M cages for Duplicated Common Control

In FlexiCom 5000 systems equipped with dual MEX-IP2 cards for Duplicated Common Control

Refer to the Program Interface Reference Manual (Chapter-4 Size Definition, Route:

SIZ, CHECK MEMORY) to display the database memory status.

3-4 Expansion Memory Cards Control Card Installation Manual

Page 155: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Dat

abas

e Ex

pans

ion

Mem

ory

Car

d 3

.................................................................................. Installing or Removing the DMB Card

The DBM card is secured to the main control processor card or to the memory

interface extension connector of another DBM card by a threaded spacer. The parts

used to attach the spacer to the main control processor card are listed below. The DBM

assembly kit includes additional parts. However, you only need to use the parts listed

below.

Preparing for DBM Installation or Removal

1 Locate a desk or table top that will support 20 lb (9.1 kg). If the surface can be

damaged by sharp objects, place a protective sheet of cardboard or similar

material over the top surface.

2 Place an anti-static sheet over the desk or table top. (The card's plastic

shipping bag will suffice.)

3 Connect the static dissipating wrist strap connector to the cage and put on the

strap. See Safety Guidelines, page 1-19.

4 Remove the main control card as described in one of the following:

Removing the MCP-IPx2 Card, page 2-17

Removing the MEX-IP2 Card, page 2-57

5 Place the main control card on the anti-static sheet.

6 Refer to the figures listed on the following page for a detailed view of the

DBM card installed onto the MCP-IPx2 and the MEX-IP2 card.

Before removing the main control card from the Coral system, do the following:

1.Perform the Database Binary Backup procedure.

2.Verify that the database is not being backed up: check that the main control card

numeric status display does not read “P”. Data will be lost if power is removed from

the system when “P” is illuminated.

3.Turn the Coral power supply OFF. The flash card could be damaged if the main control

card is removed when the system is powered.

Control Card Installation Manual Expansion Memory Cards 3-5

Page 156: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Dat

abas

e Ex

pans

ion

Mem

ory

Car

d 3

Installing the DBM Cards

The DBM card can be inserted only on the IPx Office, MCP-IPx2 and MEX-IP2 main

control processor cards.

1 Verify that all assembly parts required to assemble the DBM card to the main

control card are available. See Table 3-2.

Table 3-2 DBM Card Assembly Kit

2 Perform all of the necessary steps outlined in Preparing for DBM Installation or

Removal, page 3-5.

3 Refer to the following figures for detailed installation options of a DBM card

installed onto an MCP-IPx2 or a MEX-IP2 card:

MCP-IPx2 Cards Figure 2-6, One DBM Card Assembled onto an MCP-IPx2 Card - Front View

Figure 2-7, Two DBM cards Assembled onto an MCP-IPx-2 - Front View

Figure 2-8, Layout of DBM Card Assembled onto MCP-IPx2

Figure 2-14, MCP-IPx2 with DBM and MAP - Front View

Figure 2-15, MCP-IPx2 with DBM and CLA - Front View

MEX-IP2 Cards Figure 2-32, One DBM Card Assembled onto an MEX-IP2 Card - Top View

Figure 2-33, Two DBM Cards Assembled onto an MEX-IP2 Card - Top View

Figure 2-34, Layout of DBM Card Assembled onto MEX-IP2

Figure 2-41, MEX-IP2 with DBM and MAP - Top View

Figure 2-42, MEX-IP2 with DBM and CLA - Top View

Part Quantity

Phillips screw M3X6 6

Washer spring curved A3 6

Female-female standoff hex M3X8 (Type A, for 1st DBM) 3

Male-female standoff hex M3X8 (Type B, for 2nd DBM) 3

3-6 Expansion Memory Cards Control Card Installation Manual

Page 157: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Dat

abas

e Ex

pans

ion

Mem

ory

Car

d 3

Removing the DBM

1 Perform all of the necessary steps outlined in Preparing for DBM Installation or

Removal, page 3-5.

2 Remove the M3X6 Phillips screws and washers that secure the DBM card to

the standoff spacers of the main control processor card and safeguard for

future re-assembly.

3 Place your thumbs on the main control processor card, on either side of the

DBM card. Use your fingers to lift the edge of the DBM card on both sides

and gently disengage the multi-pin connector P1 on the DBM from the main

control processor card connector.

The DBM is powered by a backup battery positioned on the main control processor

card. Removing the DBM card from the main control processor card will cause data on

the DBM card to be lost. Perform the Database Binary Backup procedure before

removing the DBM card from the main control card.

Control Card Installation Manual Expansion Memory Cards 3-7

Page 158: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Dat

abas

e Ex

pans

ion

Mem

ory

Car

d 3

.................................................................................. Specifications - DBM

Storage capacity per chip: .......................... 1,048,576 Bytes (1MB)

Backup Battery:.......................................... Located on the Main Control Processor Card

Min. Software Version:

Coral IPx/FlexiCom ............................ Version 15

Coral Wave Gateway........................... Version 1

Mother Board: ............................................ MCP-IPx2, MEX-IP2, IPx Office

Storage Capacity:

DBM-2 ................................................ 2MB (2,097,152 Bytes) discontinued

DBM-4 ................................................ 4MB (4,194,304 Bytes)

DBM-8 ................................................ 8MB (8,388,608 Bytes)

Memory Configuration: ............................. 16 bits

3-8 Expansion Memory Cards Control Card Installation Manual

Page 159: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

C

3.2

ontrol Card Installation Manua

DBX ModuleDatabase Expansion Memory Card

DBX

Mod

ule

Dat

abas

e Ex

pans

ion

Mem

ory

Car

d3

.................................................................................. General Information

The DBX card is for use in the following control cards and systems:

Table 3-3 DBX cards, Coral Systems & Control Cards Compatibility

The DBX memory expansion card is a component of the Coral common control

section. The DBX includes 1 MB of Static Random Access Memory (SRAM), used to

store the configuration database of a Coral system. The DBX card is an optional card

that expands the database memory space. The configuration database determines the

individual characteristics of a particular installation site. Figure 3-3 illustrates the

DBX card layout.

SRAM devices require a constant source of power to retain their contents. Power to

maintain the memory is ordinarily provided by the Coral system in which the DBX is

installed. However, the DBX also contains an on-board lithium battery that provides

continuous power to the memory circuitry during the absence of system power. A

battery monitor circuit signals the main processor when the remaining electrical power

stored in the lithium backup battery has exhausted to a level that can no longer support

the memory circuitry.

Control Card Type

CDRS Coral FlexiCom Coral IPx20

0

200E

200

300

400V

400

5000

500

800

3000

Off

ice

MCP-IPx — — — — — — —

MCP-IPx2 — — — — — — —

MEX-IP — — — — —

MEX-IP2 — — — — —

l Expansion Memory Cards 3-9

Page 160: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

DBX

Mod

ule

Dat

abas

e Ex

pans

ion

Mem

ory

Car

d3

Figure 3-3 DBX Card Layout

The DBX does not occupy a card slot within the Coral system cabinet. Rather, it is

installed as a baby card onto a memory interface connector on the main control

processor card. DBX cards are installed on connector:

P11 on the MCP-IPx2 card. See Figure 2-1 on page 2-2.

P1 and P3 on the MEX-IP2 card. See Figure 2-31 on page 2-52.

The DBX card is equipped with an extension connector on the top side that extends

the memory interface connector from the main control processor card, allowing for

another DBX or CLA/MAP card to be connected on top of it. The connector on the

main control card can support two DBX cards by stacking one memory card onto the

extension connector of another. When a DBX card is installed in the extension

connector of another memory card, the memory card installed on the main control

processor card is referred to as the “lower” memory card, and the DBX installed on

the extension connector is referred to as the “upper” memory card.

The MAP/CLA is either attached to a connector on the main control card or is

“stacked” on top of the DBX card at J1. If required, DBX may be installed as either

REMOVEBEFORE

USE

DBX-1Issue 5 and later

MemoryExpansionConnector

Mounting Holesfor MEX-IP2or MEX-IP and Spacerfor MAP/CLA

Backup Battery Insulator(Pull As Shown To Remove)

Mounting Holefor MCP-IPx2 or MCP-IPxor MCP-IPsl

Mounting Holesfor MCP-IPx2

3-10 Expansion Memory Cards Control Card Installation Manual

Page 161: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

DBX

Mod

ule

Dat

abas

e Ex

pans

ion

Mem

ory

Car

d3

the lower and upper memory card at J1. Up to two DBX cards, or one DBX card and

one MAP/CLA card can be installed on the main control processor card.

Most Coral systems do not require a DBX at all. Special applications may require a

single DBX, and rarely would any system configuration require more than one DBX

card.

.................................................................................. When a DBX Card is Required

Coral CDRS 200 and FlexiCom 200, 300, 400V

To use the Directory feature

Coral CDRS 200E; IPx 500, 800 and FlexiCom 400

To use the Directory, Traffic, or Call Log features

IPx 3000 and FlexiCom 5000

In large Coral Configurations with 5000 or more ports

To use the Coral Directory, Traffic, or Call Log features

In IPx 3000 systems equipped with dual IPx 3000M cages for Duplicated

Common Control

In FlexiCom 5000 systems equipped with dual MEX-IP2 cards for

Duplicated Common Control

Consult the Program Interface Reference Manual (Chapter-4 Size Definition, Route:

SIZ, CHECK MEMORY?) to display the database memory status.

Once the system database has been installed, the position of DBX cards

(“upper” and/or “lower”) on the main control card must not be changed.Doing so will cause the Coral system to malfunction.

Control Card Installation Manual Expansion Memory Cards 3-11

Page 162: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

DBX

Mod

ule

Dat

abas

e Ex

pans

ion

Mem

ory

Car

d3

.................................................................................. Installing and Removing the DBX Card

The DBX is secured to the main control processor card or to the memory interface

extension connector of another DBX card by a threaded nylon spacer.

Preparing for DBX Installation or Removal

1 Locate a desk or table top that will support 50 lb (23 kg). If the surface can be

damaged by sharp objects, place a protective sheet of cardboard or similar

material over the top surface.

2 Place an anti-static sheet (the card's plastic shipping bag will suffice) over the

desk or table top.

3 Connect the static dissipating wrist strap connector to the cage and put on the

strap. See Safety Guidelines, page 1-19.

4 Remove the main control card as described in one of the following:

Removing the MCP-IPx2 Card, page 2-17

Removing the MEX-IP2 Card, page 2-57

5 Place the main control card on the anti-static sheet.

6 Refer to the figures listed on the following page for a detailed view of the

DBX card installed onto the MCP-IPx2 and the MEX-IP2 card.

Before removing the main control card from the Coral system, do the following:

4.Perform the Database Binary Backup procedure.

5.Verify that the database is not being backed up: check that the main control card

numeric status display does not read “P”. Data will be lost if power is removed from

the system when “P” is illuminated.

6.Turn the Coral power supply OFF. The flash card could be damaged if the main control

card is removed when the system is powered.

3-12 Expansion Memory Cards Control Card Installation Manual

Page 163: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

DBX

Mod

ule

Dat

abas

e Ex

pans

ion

Mem

ory

Car

d3

Installing the DBX Card

1 Verify that all assembly parts required to assemble the DBX card to the main

control card are available. See Table 3-2.

Table 3-4 Assembly Parts Used in DBX Assembly Kit

2 Refer to the one of the following for detailed installation options of a DBM

card installed onto an MCP-IPx2 or a MEX-IP2 card:

MCP-IPx2 Cards Figure 2-9, One DBX Card Assembled onto MCP-IPx2 Card - Front View

Figure 2-10, Two DBX Cards Assembled onto MCP-IPx2 Card - Front View

Figure 2-11, Layout of DBX Card Assembled onto an MCP-IPx2 Card

Figure 2-12, Layout of 2 DBX Card Assembled onto an MCP-IPx2 Card

Figure 2-17, MCP-IPx2 with DBX and CLA - Front View

Figure 2-18, MCP-IPx2 with DBX and MAP - Front View

MEX-IP2 Cards Figure 2-36, One DBX Card Assembled onto the P1 Connector of the MEX-IP2 Card -

Top View

Figure 2-37, Two DBX Cards Assembled onto the P1 Connector of the MEX-IP2 Card

- Top View

Figure 2-38, Layout of DBX Cards Assembled onto an MEX-IP2 Card

Figure 2-43, MEX-IP2 with DBX and CLA - Top View

Figure 2-44, MEX-IP2 with DBX and MAP - Top View

Part Quantity

Metal screw 2

Metal nut 2

Female/female hex nylon spacer 2

Female/male hex nylon spacer 2

Nylon screw 4

Control Card Installation Manual Expansion Memory Cards 3-13

Page 164: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

DBX

Mod

ule

Dat

abas

e Ex

pans

ion

Mem

ory

Car

d3

Removing the DBX Card

1 Repeat the procedure outlined in Preparing for DBX Installation or Removal,

page 3-12.

2 Remove the nylon machine screw that secures the DBX card to the standoff

spacer on the main control processor card.

3 Place your thumbs near the front side of the main control processor card, on

either side of the DBX card. Use your fingers to lift the edge of the DBX card

on both sides, gently disengaging the multi-pin connector on the DBX from

the main control processor card connector.

.................................................................................. Testing the Lithium Battery

A new lithium battery has sufficient energy to maintain power to the DBX memory

circuitry for approximately 90 days. However, the battery is not recharged when

system power returns. Thus, if the battery has powered the memory for an extended

period and low battery capacity is suspected, the contents of the memory should be

backed up and the battery replaced. The battery voltage, tested under load, can be used

to determine its state of charge. Voltage measured across a new battery connected to

the memory circuitry should fall between 3.30 and 3.35 volts. If the voltage measured

across a cylindrical battery is less than 2.50 volts, the battery should be replaced.

Replacing the Lithium Battery

In the following procedure, do not apply too much pressure to the battery holder clip

as this could cause the clip to snap.

1 Carefully raise the battery holder clip.

2 Insert the new battery with the + (positive) symbol appearing on top.

Explosion and Environmental Hazards.

There is a danger of explosion if the battery is replaced incorrectly.

Replace the battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the

manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to requirements specified by the

battery manufacturer and/or local regulatory agencies.

3-14 Expansion Memory Cards Control Card Installation Manual

Page 165: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

DBX

Mod

ule

Dat

abas

e Ex

pans

ion

Mem

ory

Car

d3

.................................................................................. Specifications - DBX

Storage Capacity: ....................................... 1,048,576 Bytes (1MB)

Memory Device:......................................... 128kb 8 bit SRAM

Backup Battery

LF1/2W, 2430, 2430B

Voltage........................................................ 3.0 VDC Nom.

Capacity...................................................... 250 mA/H

Dimensions:

Diameter .............................................. 0.965 in. (24.5 mm)

Width ................................................... 0.118 in. (3 mm)

NEDA Equivalent ............................... 5011L

Control Card Installation Manual Expansion Memory Cards 3-15

Page 166: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

DBX

Mod

ule

Dat

abas

e Ex

pans

ion

Mem

ory

Car

d3

NOTES:

3-16 Expansion Memory Cards Control Card Installation Manual

Page 167: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Main Control Card Installation Manual

Chapter

4

Flash Memory Cards IMC4(FMsl), IMC8, IMC16

4.1 Flash Memory Card ..............................................................4-1

4.2 Inserting and Removing the Flash Memory Card .................4-9

4.3 Saving to and Restoring from the Flash Card.....................4-13

Page 168: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Coral Components Discontinuation Announcement: IMC8 card has been discontinued (last time buy date June-30-2010). IMC16 cards replace the discontinued IMC8 cards, which are no longer produced.

Page 169: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

M

4.1

ain Control Card Installation M

Flash Memory CardFlash-Erasable Software Memory Card

Flas

h M

emor

y C

ard

Flas

h-Er

asab

le S

oftw

are

Mem

ory

Car

d4

.................................................................................. Introduction

The Coral system is delivered to the site with factory-loaded software on IMC card.

The IMC card contains three types of data:

Generic Feature Software Version and Boot Code

Authorization

Database Backup

The IMC card can be inserted into a PC slot using any PCMCIA application adapter

for loading a new Coral software version.

Whenever an updated version of the Coral software is released, the upgrade is

delivered to the sites either on a disk, e-mail, or via other electronic media file transfer.

The upgrade is contained in a self-extracting compressed file, specific for the site.

The upgraded generic feature software must be extracted by a PC using the FMprog

tool, and then written from the PC hard disk into the IMC card. The FMprog is a tool

for Coral dealers who install, upgrade and maintain Coral systems using flash memory

cards. For FMprog application, see the FMprog PC-Utility Reference Manual. This

reference manual describes how to install and operate the FMprog-Utility.

.................................................................................. General Information

The IMC card is an integrated memory card with 4MB, 8MB, or 16MB of flash

memory and capacity. It contains the Erasable, Programmable, Memory flash, used to

store the generic feature software of the control card and is used to store the system

database.

The following flash memory cards are available for insertion into the main control

processor card: the IMC4 (FMsl), IMC8 or IMC16. The flash memory card is a

anual Flash Memory Cards IMC4(FMsl), IMC8, IMC16 4-1

Page 170: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Flas

h M

emor

y C

ard

Flas

h-Er

asab

le S

oftw

are

Mem

ory

Car

d4

removable component of the common control section. Installed on the main control

processor card:

The IMC4 (FMsl) card includes 4MB of flash memory. This card can be used

in the Coral FlexiCom 200 and CDRS 200 systems, only.

The IMC8 card includes 8MB of flash memory. This card can be used in any

system except for the FlexiCom 200 and CDRS 200 system.

The IMC16 card includes 16MB of flash memory. This card requires Coral

Software version 15 or higher, it can be used in any system except for the

FlexiCom 200 and CDRS 200 system.

An IMC16 card is required when the database exceeds 1.5MB and can be used with Coral software version 15 or higher.

The generic feature software determines the feature operation of the Coral system. In

addition, the flash card is used to store the database backup as well as the Boot Code.

Figure 4-1 through Figure 4-5 illustrate the flash card.

The flash card is used by the main control during run-time. Therefore, the flash card

must not be removed from its drive during system operation. If removed, the system

will crash.

The main control processor card numeric status display indicates various operating

and error states of the Coral system, and can provide valuable information to assist in

the maintenance of the system. A “P” appears during software installation or backup

to indicate data programming to the flash memory of the flash card.

The flash card provides an extremely reliable and non-volatile storage medium, yet

allows field software update capability. Once programmed, the flash memory retains

its contents indefinitely without power. However, by using a precisely controlled erase

procedure, the entire flash contents can be flash cleared and then reprogrammed to

update the operating software of the system.

The IMC is a FlashLite Linear PC Card provides an easy, simple data storage in a

standard PCMCIA Type I form factor. The FlashLite PC Card provides a rugged,

removable linear flash data storage solution for mobile, embedded systems and

If the IMC flash card is removed while data is being saved or restored that data will be

lost. Do not remove an IMC flash card from the main control card while “P” is appears in

the status display.

4-2 Flash Memory Cards IMC4(FMsl), IMC8, IMC16 Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 171: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Flas

h M

emor

y C

ard

Flas

h-Er

asab

le S

oftw

are

Mem

ory

Car

d4

Telecom applications. The card can also be inserted into a PC slot using any PCMCIA

application adapter for loading a new Coral software version.

Table 4-1 displays the IMC cards supported by each software version. Table 4-2

displays the IMC cards compatible with each main control card. Table 4-3 displays the

IMC cards that are compatible with each Coral system.

Table 4-1 IMC Card Compatibility with Coral Version

Table 4-2 IMC Card Compatibility with Control Cards

Table 4-3 IMC Card Compatibility with Coral Version and Control Card

IMC CardCoral Software Version

11 - 14 15 or Higher WG

IMC4 (FMsl)*

* Coral FlexiCom 200 and CDRS 200 only

IMC8

IMC16 —

IMC CardMain Control Card

MEX-IP MCP-IPx MEX-IP2 MCP-IPx2

IMC4 (FMsl)*

* Coral FlexiCom 200 and CDRS 200 only

— —

IMC8 —

IMC16 †

† IMC16 requires Coral Software Version 15 or later.

— —

IMC Card

CDRS FlexiCom IPx

200 200E 200 300 400V 400 5000 500 800 3000

IMC4 — — — — — — — —

IMC8 — —

IMC16*

* IMC16 requires software version 15 or higher.

— —

Main Control Card Installation Manual Flash Memory Cards IMC4(FMsl), IMC8, IMC16 4-3

Page 172: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Flas

h M

emor

y C

ard

Flas

h-Er

asab

le S

oftw

are

Mem

ory

Car

d4

.................................................................................. Flash Card Slot in the MCP-IPx and MCP-IPx2 Cards

The flash card is installed on the printed side of the MCP-IPx and MCP-IPx2 cards.

The labels are affixed to the flash cards by the manufacturer as shown in Figure 4-1

and Figure 4-2.

Figure 4-1 Flash Memory Card Installed into MCP-IPx and MCP-IPx2 Card - Left

Figure 4-2 Flash Memory Card Installed into MCP-IPx and MCP-IPx2 Card - Right

4-4 Flash Memory Cards IMC4(FMsl), IMC8, IMC16 Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 173: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Flas

h M

emor

y C

ard

Flas

h-Er

asab

le S

oftw

are

Mem

ory

Car

d4

Figure 4-3 IMC Card Installed in MCP-IPx or MCP-IPx2

IMCRELEASEBUTTON

MCP-IPx2

IMC4,IMC8,IMC16

DIP Switches

Reset

Status Display

KB0RS-232E

MCP-IPx2

LAN Indicator

IMC4,IMC8,IMC16

Watchdog Indicator

IMCRELEASEBUTTON

Main Control Card Installation Manual Flash Memory Cards IMC4(FMsl), IMC8, IMC16 4-5

Page 174: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Flas

h M

emor

y C

ard

Flas

h-Er

asab

le S

oftw

are

Mem

ory

Car

d4

.................................................................................. Flash Card Slot in the MEX-IP and MEX-IP2 Cards

The flash card is installed on the component side of the MEX-IP and MEX-IP2 cards.

The labels are affixed to the flash cards by the manufacturer as shown in Figure 4-4

and Figure 4-5.

Figure 4-4 Flash Memory Card Installed into MEX-IP and MEX-IP2 Cards- Left side

Figure 4-5 Flash Memory Card installed into MEX-IP and MEX-IP2 Cards - Right Side

4-6 Flash Memory Cards IMC4(FMsl), IMC8, IMC16 Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 175: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Flas

h M

emor

y C

ard

Flas

h-Er

asab

le S

oftw

are

Mem

ory

Car

d4

Figure 4-6 IMC Card Installed in MEX-IP or MEX-IP2

Front Right Side

IMC8,16Flash memory card

(Software & Database)

RE

MO

VE

BE

FO

RE

US

E

RESET

MEX-IP2

Database MemoryBackup Battery

P3

LAN

SAU

1st DBX/ 4th DBX/

CLA / MAPConnector

2nd DBX/ 3rd DBX

Connector

DBM / MAPConnector

P1

P2

IMC8/16Release

button

IMC8/16drive

KB0

Main Control Card Installation Manual Flash Memory Cards IMC4(FMsl), IMC8, IMC16 4-7

Page 176: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Flas

h M

emor

y C

ard

Flas

h-Er

asab

le S

oftw

are

Mem

ory

Car

d4

.................................................................................. Specifications - IMC

Memory Configuration: ............................. 16 bits

PCMCIA: ................................................... Standard Compatible

Table 4-4 IMC Card Specifications IMC Card Storage

CapacityCoral

VersionsControl Cards

Coral Systems

IMC4 (FMsl) 4,194,304 Bytes (4MB)

14 or lower MCP-IPx, MCP-IPx2

CDRS 200

FlexiCom 200

IMC8 8,388,608 Bytes (8MB)

11 or higher MEX-IP, MEX-IP2,MCP-IPx2

CDRS 200E,IPx 500, 800, 3000

FlexiCom 300, 400V, 400, 5000

IMC16*

* An IMC16 card is required when the database exceeds 1.5MB

16,777,216 Bytes (16MB)

15 or higher MEX-IP2, MCP-IPx2

IPx 500, 800, 3000

FlexiCom 400, 5000

4-8 Flash Memory Cards IMC4(FMsl), IMC8, IMC16 Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 177: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

M

4.2

ain Control Card Installation M

Inserting and Removing the Flash Memory Card

Inse

rting

and

Rem

ovin

g th

e Fl

ash

Mem

ory

Car

d Fl

ash-

Eras

able

Sof

twar

e M

emor

y C

ard

4

The flash memory card does not occupy a card slot within the Coral system. It is

installed on the PCMCIA connector of the main control card. The flash memory

release button releases the flash card. An arrow on the front side of the flash card

indicates the insertion direction. The flash card position in the main control processor

card is shown in , Figure 4-3 and Figure 4-6.

.................................................................................. Inserting and Removing the Flash Card

The flash card contains three types of data:

Generic Feature Software Version

Database Backup

Boot Code

When replacing a flash card with another card that contains upgraded software, the

new card might not contain an updated database. If the new card does not contain a

database, it is important to make a binary backup of the existing database before

removing the card. See the Database Binary Backup PC Utility Reference Manual for

further details.

Before removing a memory card from the Coral system, do the following:

1.Perform the Database Binary Backup procedure.

2.Verify that the database is not being backed up: check that the main control card

numeric status display does not read “P”. Data will be lost if power is removed from

the system when “P” is illuminated.

3.Turn the Coral power supply OFF. The flash card could be damaged if removed when

the system is powered.

anual Flash Memory Cards IMC4(FMsl), IMC8, IMC16 4-9

Page 178: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Inse

rting

and

Rem

ovin

g th

e Fl

ash

Mem

ory

Car

d Fl

ash-

Eras

able

Sof

twar

e M

emor

y C

ard

4

Removing the Flash Memory Card

1 When required, save the Coral database to the flash card and wait while the

data is being written to the flash card. See Saving to the Flash Card, page 4-14.

2 Verify that the numeric status display on the main control processor card

(MEX-IP2, MCP-IPx2, etc.) does NOT read “P”. When “P” is illuminated on the numeric status display, data is being written to

the flash card.

3 Turn off the power supply card switch in the main unit.

4 For Coral CDRS 200, 200E; FlexiCom 200, 5000; IPx 500, 800, 3000:If expansion cages are installed in the system, turn the power supply of all

expansion cages OFF.

5 Press the flash memory card release button on the front panel of the main

control processor card (MEX-IP2, MCP-IPx2, etc.). This releases the flash

card from the drive.

Inserting the Flash Memory Card

1 Remove the old memory card, as described in Removing the Flash Memory Card,

page 4-10.

2 Turn off the power supply card switch in the main unit.

3 For Coral CDRS 200, 200E; FlexiCom 200, 5000; IPx 500, 800, 3000:If expansion cages are installed in the system, turn the power supply of all

expansion cages OFF.

4 Insert the flash card into the drive on the front panel of the main control card

(MCP-IPx2, MEX-IP2, MCP-IPx, or MEX-IP).

Turn the Coral power supply OFF. The flash card could be damaged if inserted when the

system is powered.

Push the flash card very gently during the card insertion. The flash card could be

damaged if inserted with excessive force.

4-10 Flash Memory Cards IMC4(FMsl), IMC8, IMC16 Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 179: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Inse

rting

and

Rem

ovin

g th

e Fl

ash

Mem

ory

Car

d Fl

ash-

Eras

able

Sof

twar

e M

emor

y C

ard

4

5 For Coral FlexiCom 200 or CDRS 200 systems with MCP-IPx2 main control

card and IMC4 (FMsl), set DIP switch #3 on the MCP-IPx2 front panel to the

left position, as shown in Figure 2-3 on page 2-6.

6 For Coral IPx 500 or CDRS 200E systems with MCP-IPx2 main control card

and IMC8/16, set DIP switch #3 on the MCP-IPx2 front panel to the right

position, as shown Figure 2-3 on page 2-6.

7 Turn ON the power supply card switch in the main cage or cabinet.

8 Verify that the following two messages appear on the PI device:

For SERVICE/SOFTWARE installation menuHIT <CTRL l> NOW

********************************

CHK RAM

END CHK RAM

Custom Init Code...

The second message may appear after two or three minutes, following several

short messages that appear during system start-up:

CCS is on the air ......(ROOT)CCS xx.xx.xxCopyright (c) 2001-xxxx ...............NAME - (site name)SAU# -

After the second message appears, the system is initialized properly and

capable of processing calls. After entering the password, the version level of

the generic feature software is indicated where the x's appear in the line that

reads CCS xx.xx.xx.

9 If the new flash memory card does not include a backup of the current

database, perform the procedure described in Saving to the Flash Card, page 4-14.

10 For Coral CDRS 200, 200E; FlexiCom 200, 5000; IPx 500, 800, 3000:If expansion cages are installed in the system, turn the power supply of each

expansion cage ON again to initialize the peripheral cards in each cage.

The generic feature software contained in the memory card is coded to function with

one (and only one) Software Authorization Unit (SAU), which must be installed on

the MEX-IP2 or MCP-IPx2 card. The SAU also includes information regarding the

features and the highest Coral version authorized to be used in the specific system.

Main Control Card Installation Manual Flash Memory Cards IMC4(FMsl), IMC8, IMC16 4-11

Page 180: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Inse

rting

and

Rem

ovin

g th

e Fl

ash

Mem

ory

Car

d Fl

ash-

Eras

able

Sof

twar

e M

emor

y C

ard

4

If the any of the following conditions exist, Coral system automatically ceases call processing after 14 days:

The serial number of the SAU does not match the serial number coded into the generic software

The generic feature software contained in the memory card is higher than authorized by the SAU

The SAU is removed from the MEX-IP2 or MCP-IPx card

The program contained on the memory card permits the generic software to function

even if the serial number of the SAU is incorrect, or the SAU is absent entirely. If,

however, the Coral determines that the SAU is missing or not correct, a message

appears during the procedure warning that the system will not operate without the

proper SAU. This provision allows the generic feature software and/or feature

authorizations to be upgraded on a memory card in another distant system, then

installed at the proper system by replacing the existing memory card from the other

distant system containing the upgrade.

4-12 Flash Memory Cards IMC4(FMsl), IMC8, IMC16 Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 181: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

M

4.3

ain Control Card Installation M

Saving to and Restoring from the Flash Card

Savi

ng to

and

Res

torin

g fro

m th

e Fl

ash

Car

d Fl

ash-

Eras

able

Sof

twar

e M

emor

y C

ard

4

During normal system operation, the configuration database may be saved to a file on

the flash memory card for permanent storage. The system may also be programmed to

save the database to the flash memory card automatically on a daily basis, at a

particular time.

A saved database file may be loaded at any time into the system database memory.

This is a way to restore the database into the RAM of a new main control card and an

expansion memory card.

After a new card is installed, verify that the PI starts up properly, and then save the

database in accordance with the following procedure. Once the database in the system

has been constructed, copy the database onto the flash memory card.

.................................................................................. Accessing the Database Flash Menu

1 If a session has not already been established, establish a PI programming

session by entering a PI password.

2 Select the Database Flash Menu (Route: ROOT,0,10,2,2) branch. The Database

Flash menu appears, as follows:

FLASH -MENU

0 - SAVE1 - LOAD DBS2 - SHOW FILE INFO3 - AUTO BACKUP4 - ERASE

anual Flash Memory Cards IMC4(FMsl), IMC8, IMC16 4-13

Page 182: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Savi

ng to

and

Res

torin

g fro

m th

e Fl

ash

Car

d Fl

ash-

Eras

able

Sof

twar

e M

emor

y C

ard

4

.................................................................................. Saving to the Flash Card

The Database Save feature allows the system database to be copied to the flash card at

any time. The procedure is as follows:

1 Verify that the system time and date are correct (press Control-T to check).

Update through the Time and Date branch (Route: TIME) of the system

database if necessary.

2 From the Database Flash menu press 0 to save the database to a file on the

flash card. The system prompts for the selection of a destination file number,

either DB0.DEF or DB1.DEF, with:

DEST FILE (0,1) - [0]

The DB0.DEF file may be saved automatically at a preset time each day and

so is usually more up-to-date than the DB1.DEF file. See Automatic Daily

Backup, page 4-19. The DB1.DEF file is referred to as the technician’s copy of

the database, and should be saved each time installation or maintenance

personnel make changes to the database.

3 Press 0 or 1, according to the table below, to begin saving the system database

to a file. The default entry is 0 or DB0.DEF.

4 When the prompt EXECUTE (Y/N) - [N] appears, type Y to begin the save

process, or N to cancel and return to the Database IMC4/IMC8/IMC16 menu.

The PI command prompt (*:) will return immediately, but the system will

process the command as a background (low priority) task.

Saving the database to a file generally takes several seconds. While the database is being saved, it is important to note that changes to the system configuration (such as: changing the system to Night Service, setting a Call Forward or Do Not Disturb instruction at a station, even turning on or off Background Music at a key set) are disabled until the database save process is completed.

If the system is unable to save the database, one of several messages will be

generated by the system.

Database File Name

PI Entry File Description

DB0.DEF 0 Backup automatically at a preset time

DB1.DEF 1 Manual backup, typically used by a technician

4-14 Flash Memory Cards IMC4(FMsl), IMC8, IMC16 Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 183: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Savi

ng to

and

Res

torin

g fro

m th

e Fl

ash

Car

d Fl

ash-

Eras

able

Sof

twar

e M

emor

y C

ard

4

When the flash memory space is insufficient for saving the database (DBS),

the following message will appear:

NO SPACE FOR SAVING DATA BASE

When at least one of the flags cannot be recognized, the following message

will appear:

CORRUPTED

DBS

5 When the backup is valid, the save operation continues with:

Caution: Previous backup will be lost:Proceed with backup (Y/N) [N]

Type Y to continue the save operation. The following message appears:

SAVING........

If the backup file is saved successfully, the following message appears:

SAVE OK.....

If the backup file save operation fails, the following message appears:

SAVE FAILED!!

During the save operation, no database updating will occur.

Main Control Card Installation Manual Flash Memory Cards IMC4(FMsl), IMC8, IMC16 4-15

Page 184: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Savi

ng to

and

Res

torin

g fro

m th

e Fl

ash

Car

d Fl

ash-

Eras

able

Sof

twar

e M

emor

y C

ard

4

.................................................................................. Loading (Restoring) from the Flash Card

A system database stored in a flash card can be loaded into the system database

memory at any time. This is how to restore the database into the RAM of a main

control card (MCP-IPx2, MEX-IP2, MCP-IPX, or MEX-IP) and an expansion

memory card (DBM or DBX).

Loading the database from a flash card generally takes several minutes. During this process, the Coral system is non-operational.

Loading a database can be useful for installing the database of an existing system into

the database memory of another system that will have a substantially similar

configuration. Similarly, a database can be created by programming a system off-line

at another location (perhaps at the distributor's facilities). The database can then be

loaded at a convenient time at the intended site.

1. From the Database Flash Menu, press 1 to load a database from flash.

The system will display the following message:

CAUTION: Database contents will be lost & system will restart !!!Proceed with restore (Y/N) ? [N]

2. If Y is selected, the system prompts to select a source file number, either DB0.DEF or DB1.DEF with:

FILE (0/1) - [0]

3. Press 0 or 1, according to the table below, to begin loading the database stored in the flash card.

The following prompt appears:

EXECUTE (Y/N) - [N]

Loading a database from a flash card into the system database memory destroys the

original database information stored in the database memory and overwrites it with

information in the flash database file. Once overwritten, the original database cannot be

recovered.

Database File Name PI Entry File Description

DB0.DEF 0 Daily backup automatically at a preset time

DB1.DEF 1 Technician copy for manual backup

4-16 Flash Memory Cards IMC4(FMsl), IMC8, IMC16 Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 185: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Savi

ng to

and

Res

torin

g fro

m th

e Fl

ash

Car

d Fl

ash-

Eras

able

Sof

twar

e M

emor

y C

ard

4

4. If you type Y, the system goes through the following retrieval conditions check sequence:

a Verify that the internal flags are present in the database to be loaded.

b Verify that the database is not corrupted (the system executes the checksum

test procedure).

If the procedure checking the database (DBS) retrieval conditions found the

above conditions fulfilled, the following message will appear:

Restore DBS.......

Upon finishing the restoring procedure, the system reports:

Restore Successful

Next, the system will execute the partial initialization.

If the conditions mentioned above were not met, one of the following

messages will be displayed:

Operation denied DB0.DEF is not O.K.

or

Operation denied DB1.DEF is not O.K.

If only one backup file was present when the technician requested DB1.DEF

retrieval, the following message appears:

Operation denied, Load DBS available only to DB0.DEF

5. Press Y to begin loading the database, or press N to return to the Database menu.

Loading the database from a file generally takes several minutes. When the

database has been loaded, the system performs a partial initialization and

begins processing calls.

Main Control Card Installation Manual Flash Memory Cards IMC4(FMsl), IMC8, IMC16 4-17

Page 186: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Savi

ng to

and

Res

torin

g fro

m th

e Fl

ash

Car

d Fl

ash-

Eras

able

Sof

twar

e M

emor

y C

ard

4

.................................................................................. Displaying File Information

This option displays the list of backed up files stored on the flash card.

From the Database Flash menu, press 2 to display the list of backed up files. The

following prompt appears:

Execute (Y/N)? - [N]

Type Y. A report appears with the following columns:

File Name Displays a list of the DB0.DEF and DB1.DEF filesIf only one file is present, DB0.DEF will appear

Version File version

Last Date Last backup date

Last-Time Last backup time

File-Status OK - the backed up file is validInvalid - the backed up file is invalid

4-18 Flash Memory Cards IMC4(FMsl), IMC8, IMC16 Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 187: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Savi

ng to

and

Res

torin

g fro

m th

e Fl

ash

Car

d Fl

ash-

Eras

able

Sof

twar

e M

emor

y C

ard

4

.................................................................................. Automatic Daily Backup

The system configuration database can be automatically saved to a database file on the

IMC8 at a preset time each day. Use AutoBackup to automatically save the database.

During automatic daily backup the database is saved to DB0.DEF.

1 From the Database Menu, press 3 to set the Auto Backup time. The following

prompt appears:

NUMBER OF DAYS BETWEEN BACKUPS [1..to..255, N]

Set the number of days between automatic backups. The default is set to 7

days between backups, so that an automatic backup file is created every week.

If no automatic backups are needed, enter N for creating manual backups.

Selection of the backup type is required; either a manual backup performed by

the technician or an automatic daily backup. The default after First

Initialization is automatic daily backup every week.

2 Enter N to enable the manual backup or a number between 1 and 255 to

enable a daily backup.

The system prompts for the time of day with:

SET AUTO BACKUP TIME:TIME:

3 Enter the time of day to automatically save the system database in the 24 hour,

military time format. Use 24:00 for midnight and 24:01 to 24:59 for times

between midnight and 1:00 a.m. The default time is 01:30, or 1:30 a.m.

4 The system will return to the Database Backup menu. Press 0 to return to the

Database menu.

Main Control Card Installation Manual Flash Memory Cards IMC4(FMsl), IMC8, IMC16 4-19

Page 188: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Savi

ng to

and

Res

torin

g fro

m th

e Fl

ash

Car

d Fl

ash-

Eras

able

Sof

twar

e M

emor

y C

ard

4

.................................................................................. Erasing Flash Memory

This function enables erasing of backed up files stored on the flash card:

1 From the Database menu, press 4 to erase the flash memory.

The following prompt appears:

Proceed with Erase (0/1/A/N/) ? [N]

2 Specify one of the options, as follows:

0 - erases DB0.DEF.

1 - erases DB1.DEF.

A - erases both DB0.DEF and DB1.DEF.

N - cancels the operation.

After you specify 0, 1, or A, the following message appears:

Erasing ..

Upon completion of the erasing the following message appears:

Erase Completed ....

If the erasing operation was not successful the following message appears:

Erase failed !!

Performing the following procedure will erase the Flash DBS backup. Before erasing,

verify that the database is no longer needed.

4-20 Flash Memory Cards IMC4(FMsl), IMC8, IMC16 Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 189: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Main Control Card Installation Manual

Chapter

5

Software Authorization Unit (SAU)

5.1 Software Authorization Unit (SAU) .......................................5-1

Page 190: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document
Page 191: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

M

5.1

ain Control Card Installation M

Software Authorization Unit (SAU)

Softw

are

Auth

oriz

atio

n U

nit (

SAU

) 5

.................................................................................. Software Authorization Management

The main control processor card supervises the feature authorization using the SAU

(Software Authorization Unit) lock device. The SAU is a small, encapsulated device

that is plugged into a connector positioned on the components side of the MCP-IPx2

and MCP-IPx cards or on the front panel of the MEX-IP2 and MEX-IP cards. See

Chapter 2, Main Control Processor Cards. The SAU is displayed in Figure 5-1.

The SAU is not used in Coral Wave Gateway (WG) systems. Authorization for Coral WG systems is enabled via other media. For further information, see the Coral WG installation manuals.

The SAU enables a set of permissions and feature authorizations associated with its

unique identification number. The Coral software detects and verifies the permission

settings of the SAU on the Control card enabling the system to function properly.

During software installation, the SAU serial number is compared with the feature

authorization data to verify the authorized use of enhanced Coral system features.

During regular system operation, the SAU is checked to ensure that it remains attached

to the main control processor card. However, if necessary, the SAU can be removed

for short periods (a maximum of two weeks) without interrupting system operation. If

the SAU is removed for more than two weeks, the system ceases to process calls.

The Coral system automatically ceases call processing after 14 days if:

The SAU serial number does not match the corresponding flash memory card serial number (FMsl, IMC4, IMC8, or IMC16).

The Coral generic version contained in the flash memory card is later than is authorized by

the SAU. An SAU is removed from the main control processor card.

Relevant system messages appear on the PI, warning that the system will not operate

without the proper SAU.

anual Software Authorization Unit (SAU) 5-1

Page 192: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Softw

are

Auth

oriz

atio

n U

nit (

SAU

) 5

When a main control processor card is replaced, the SAU must be removed from the

old card and be installed on the replaced main control processor card.

Figure 5-1 Software Authorization Unit (SAU) Detail

When starting up the Coral system, ensure that there are no SAU Fault messages

during startup or SAU Alarms (PI Branch: Root, 1, 1, 15-Controls) due to any one of

the following three reasons:

Missing SAU device

Inappropriate SAU software for this type of system

Mismatched SAU serial numbers on the flash card and SAU device

SAU Unique Serial Numbers

Each SAU is assigned a unique, factory set, system identification serial number that

enables the feature authorizations and Coral generic software version for the Coral

system. Figure 5-1 illustrates the four side views of the SAU, including sample ID

numbers. The left side includes the country code, while the right side includes the

unique serial number. The last digit of the serial number is a verification digit. Any

leading zeros, as well as the verification digit do not appear in the SAU number

reported in the PI root menu.

SAUs for Dual Coral Cages and Cabinets (Duplicated Common Controls)

For Coral IPx 3000 and FlexiCom 5000 systems that have dual cages and cabinets for

duplicated common control, the software detects the information embedded on both

SAU devices (one on each main control processor card) and verifies that the same

Coral version is loaded on both SAUs.

The SAU installed on the master control is given a different serial number than the one

installed on the slave control. The technician must ensure that the SAU device serial

Pro

pert

y of T

adi

ran T

ele

com

SAU

72

44

09

97

00

0

*0

15

*

72

44

09

97

00

0

*0

00

07

19

*

FRONT LEFT SIDE: MARKET NUMBER

BAR CODE

RIGHT SIDE:SERIAL NUMBER

BAR CODE

REAR

5-2 Software Authorization Unit (SAU) Main Control Card Installation Manual

Page 193: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Softw

are

Auth

oriz

atio

n U

nit (

SAU

) 5

number must match the flash card serial number, installed on the corresponding main

control processor card.

Verify that the SAU device serial number (market number and serial number bar codes

together) matches the SAU serial number on the corresponding IMC8, or IMC16 card

label, inserted in the main control processor card on the same side of the control shelf

(master and slave controls). Otherwise, the system will automatically shut down after 14

days.

Main Control Card Installation Manual Software Authorization Unit (SAU) 5-3

Page 194: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

NOTES:

Page 195: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Control Card Installation Manual

Chapter

6

Application Cards

6.1 MAP Card .............................................................................6-1

6.2 CLA Card ............................................................................6-27

Page 196: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document
Page 197: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

C

6.1

ontrol Card Installation Manua

MAP CardManagement Applications Platform Card

MAP

Car

d M

anag

emen

t App

licat

ions

Pla

tform

Car

d6

.................................................................................. General Description

In the Coral IPx Office the MAP card is embedded as a software only application on the MCB Office (main board of the Coral IPx Office) and provides all the functionality as described below.In the Coral Wave Gateway the MAP card functions as the signaling interface to the Aeonix, when a Coral IPx/FlexiCom system is converted to work as “Wave Gateway” of the Aeonix.

Tip:

The MAP card can be used to replace the CLA1 card, the STIP2 unit, and

the LIU3 card.

This chapter includes a description of control cards that support software applications

that run on the CDRS 200, Coral IPx 500, 800, 3000 and FlexiCom 200, 300, 400V,

400, 5000 systems. This section describes the Management Application Platform

(MAP) card. The MAP card is displayed in Figure 6-1 and Figure 6-2.

The MAP card allows you to manage different external software applications that

interact with the Coral, as well as some of its internal card software, via a single

platform. The allotted managed software differs according to the Coral system.

The MAP card enables media flow between the main control processor card of the

Coral and the IP world. The MAP module is physically connected to the Coral's

control system and provides an Ethernet 10/100Base-T via RJ-45 output connector for

interfacing with the external computer network.

1. F-CLA 686 card, CLA 486 card, and CLA 386 card can be replaced by the MAP card.2. The STIP unit for the CFM application is replaced by the MAP card CNCM’s IP connectiv-

ity, but no Dry Contacts provided.3. The LIU card for the Program Interface PI’s IP connectivity is replaced by the CNCM’s IP

connectivity.

l Application Cards 6-1

Page 198: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MAP

Car

d M

anag

emen

t App

licat

ions

Pla

tform

Car

d6

The MAP card is installed as a daughterboard on the MCP-IPx2, MEX-IP2, MCP-IPx,

or the MCP-IPx main control card. The Coral IPx Office includes the MAP application

embedded onto the MCB office control card (also known as C/MAP).

The MAP card provides the physical connection, through the J-BUS, to the main

control card, the call processor of the Coral system, and provides the front panel RJ-45

LAN connection to the IP world. Its front panel also contains a LED indicator, a reset

push button, and an RS-232 COM port. When lit, the LED indicates that the MAP card

is active and functional.

The MAP card contains the memory required for the card’s software and the shared

memory used for information transfer on the bus interface circuit. Table 6-1 displays

the MAP card supported by each software version. Table 6-6 displays the MAP

daughterboard compatible with each main control card.

The MAP card provides the CNCM and CoraLINK applications.

Table 6-1 Applications Supported by MAP Card

Application

Coral Software Version

11 14 15 15.5or higher

CNCM No No No Yes

CoraLINK (CLA) Yes Yes Yes Yes

6-2 Application Cards Control Card Installation Manual

Page 199: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MAP

Car

d M

anag

emen

t App

licat

ions

Pla

tform

Car

d6

.................................................................................. Physical Description

The MAP card includes the following components. See Figure 6-1 and Figure 6-2.

Table 6-2 MAP Card Front Panel

Table 6-3 MAP Card Right Side

Component Description

Status Indicator LED (red)

When lit, indicates that the MAP card is active and properly functional.

Reset Pushbutton Resets the card. The card automatically reestablishes a network connection.

COM1 Connector For factory use, only.

Green LED When lit, indicates that the cable is correctly connected to the LAN.

Line Connection RJ-45 Ethernet 10/100 Base-T.

Yellow LED When lit, indicates that the card is running at 100Mbps.

Component Description

Status Indicator LED (red)

Indicates that the MAP card is active and properly functional

Reset Pushbutton Resets the card. The card automatically reestablishes a network connection.

JU1 Jumper For factory use, only

S1 DIP switch Used to configure card to function as MAP or as CLA. See Setting the MAP Card DIP Switches, page 6-11.

P6 Connector Used to connect a DBM card

P2 Connector For factory use, only

U25 Hard Disk Connector

Used to connect the flat cable to the hard disk

Control Card Installation Manual Application Cards 6-3

Page 200: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MAP

Car

d M

anag

emen

t App

licat

ions

Pla

tform

Car

d6

Table 6-4 MAP Card Left Side

Figure 6-1 MAP Card Front Panel and Right Side

Figure 6-2 MAP Card Left Side

Component Description

J2 Connector Used to connect an MCP-IPx or a MEX-IP card, or to connect above a DBX card

J3 Connector Used to connect to an MCP-IPx2 or a MEX-IP2 card, or to connect above a DBM card.

MAP

RST

COM

LAN

1 2 3

ON

4

Status indicatorLED

Resetpushbutton

MaintenanceRS-232 port

RJ-45 LAN port

P2

P6

J2U25 Hard diskconnector

1 2 3 4

ON

OFF

Reset pushbutton Status indicator LED

JU1

MAP/CLADIP switch selector

Hard diskposition

Green LED indicator

Yellow LED indicator

S1

S1

J2

J3

6-4 Application Cards Control Card Installation Manual

Page 201: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MAP

Car

d M

anag

emen

t App

licat

ions

Pla

tform

Car

d6

.................................................................................. MAP Functional Block Diagram

A functional block diagram of the MAP card is displayed in Figure 6-3. A process

flow diagram of the MAP card within the Coral system is displayed in Figure 6-4.

The Ethernet Network Interface (LAN Communication Controller) is an adapter for

interconnecting the system with the Ethernet LAN external computer network.

The CoreModule 32-bit CPU compatible incorporates the elements of a PC

compatible computer and provides the processing power needed to control the

CoraLINK adapter. The MAP card contains a PC104 BUS to interconnect the mini

modules. The PC104 BUS is electrically identical to the ISA BUS. The

communication in this configuration is controlled by an intelligent CPU controller.

The communications software and part of the application software is run on the card

by the local CPU and is not loaded to the exchange call processor (main control

processor card). The MAP card contains a 128 MB SDRAM (Synchronized Dynamic

RAM) memory, shared between the MAP and the main control card. The shared

memory is accessed from the MAP card (via the PC104 BUS and via the J-bus from

the main control processor card). A hard disk can be used to store some of the card

applications that are too heavy to be stored on the flash memory built-in to the MAP

card. When these applications are used, they are factory-loaded.

The MAP card also contains an NMI/watchdog circuit, providing a reset signal to the

CoreModule if it detects a failure in the software cycle.

The communication protocol implemented in the network is TCP/IP. The connection

to the computer network is made with an RJ-45 connector type in accordance with the

10/100Base-T protocol and is located on the front panel of the MAP base card.

Control Card Installation Manual Application Cards 6-5

Page 202: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MAP

Car

d M

anag

emen

t App

licat

ions

Pla

tform

Car

d6

Figure 6-3 MAP Card Functional Block Diagram

Figure 6-4 MAP Card Process Flow Diagram

9-PIND-TYPE RS-232for cardconfiguration

COM 1

ETHERNET10Base-T

NETWORKRJ-45

CPUXScale 42x

Arbiter

SDRAM

DiskController

CompactFlash

Hard Disk

Management ApplicationPlatform

Sharedmemory

Flash

Coral System

CoralMain Controller

(MEX-IP2,MCP-IPx2,MCP-IPx,

orMEX-IP)

Wakeup

PI

CVD

Traffic

CFM

Charge

SMDR

MCT

CoraLINK (CLA)

CNCM(Coral MSW

15.5 orhigher)

SharedMemory

Main ControlProcessorMCP-IPx2,MEX-IP2,MCP-IPx,

orMEX-IP

MAP

MAP WEB portal

SeaMail (IPx Office)

6-6 Application Cards Control Card Installation Manual

Page 203: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MAP

Car

d M

anag

emen

t App

licat

ions

Pla

tform

Car

d6

.................................................................................. MAP Applications

The MAP card includes the following applications:

Coral Network Communication Manager (CNCM) - directs data between Coral

and the IP world, including CFM, Wakeup, Charge, MCT, CVD, PI, DI Alarm,

SMDR, Traffic

The MAP card does not support Initialization messages, GP messages and other online Alarm messages, when used to communicate with the PI (Program Interface) over IP.

SeaMail - Voicemail application (in IPx Office)

TG-CGW - transfers voice and data to and from the Coral system to the

Aeonix when the Coral system is converted to work as a Wave Gateway

system.

Coral Link Adapter (CLA) - Acts as an interface between the Coral system

and any CTI server application (Composite, FlexCT, etc.). For more

information, see Coral Link Adapter Application, page 6-40.

The CoraLINK (CLA) should be accompanied by an appropriate software application. Please contact the manufacturer for the required CTI application and/or price list. See Chapter 2 in the Coral FlexiCom & Coral IPx Product Description, for more details.

Web Server - interface from which the MAP card is configured

Application Manager - manages all of the other applications on the MAP card

IP Connectivity via the CNCM

The CNCM offers integrated Coral system IP connectivity to replace the Coral KBn

serial connections RS-232 (KB0, KB1, RMI, 8DRCF, 8DRCM). CNCM IP

connectivity offers:

Faster and more reliable connections than the serial connections or even the

STIP and LIU IP connections. For example, the CNCM allows SMDR

buffering whereby the SMDR records are saved, even if the connection is lost.

Concurrent Users: For PI and CVD IP connectivity, up to four concurrent users

can connect via the same TCP/IP network socket (as opposed to a STIP

Control Card Installation Manual Application Cards 6-7

Page 204: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MAP

Car

d M

anag

emen

t App

licat

ions

Pla

tform

Car

d6

connection, where only one user can connect to an application). This amplified

IP connectivity also enables SMDR redundancy by allowing records to be sent

to two different TCP/IP socket destinations.

Port per Application: The connections must be pre-configured to a specific

application, and cannot be changed dynamically (e.g. CVD and PI cannot

share the same TCP port definition).

CLA and UGW relationship to MAP

The IP Address for the CLA card is shared with the MAP IP Address. Therefore, if the

CLA IP Address is changed in the Coral system, then the MAP’s IP Address has

changed, requiring all its client components IP Addresses to be changed as well.

The MAP software also runs the CoraLINK (CLA). For the IPx Office, the MAP IP

Address is defined via the CUGW card in the UGW Card Configuration branch. This

IP Address is also used as the CLA’s IP address. Therefore, when the MAP is in an

ACTIVE state, CLA IP Address information cannot be updated (in the CLA branch)

and a relevant error message is issued.

MAP Cards for Dual Coral Units (Duplicated Common Controls)

For Coral IPx 3000 and FlexiCom 5000 systems that have dual cages and cabinets for

duplicated common control, the software detects the information embedded on both

MAP cards (one on each main control processor card) and verifies that the same Coral

version is loaded on both MAP cards.

TCP IP Sockets

The CNCM acts as a TCP/IP Server for most of its connected applications. All the

applications are connected with the same IP Address while their ports differ and are

assigned by the CNCM.

SMDR TCP IP Sockets

The SMDR application, however, may be defined as a SMDR Client or TCP/IP

Server, as required:

SMDR Server, the application can send SMDR reports to one TCP/IP socket destination, only.

SMDR Client, the application can send SMDR reports to up to two TCP/IP socket destinations. This provides additional redundancy as SMDR output is sent to two different devices simultaneously.

6-8 Application Cards Control Card Installation Manual

Page 205: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MAP

Car

d M

anag

emen

t App

licat

ions

Pla

tform

Car

d6

.................................................................................. Installing the MAP Card

This section describes how to install the MAP card onto the different main control

cards and in the different possible configurations.

The MAP card can be installed only on the MCP-IPx2, MEX-IP2, MCP-IPx and MEX-IP main control cards and on any Wave Gateway version.

The MAP does not occupy a card slot within any Coral system cage. Rather, it is

installed as a daughterboard onto a memory interface connector on the main control

processor card. Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-31 display the location of the interface

connector on the main control processor cards.

Unlike the DBM/DBX memory card, the MAP card is not equipped with an extension

connector on the top side. The main control processor card bus interface connector can

support two DBM/DBX memory cards or one DBM/DBX card and one MAP card, by

stacking one card onto the extension connector of another DBM/DBX memory card.

When a MAP card is installed in the extension connector of another DBM/DBX

memory card, the DBM/DBX memory card installed on the main control card is

referred to as the “lower” card, and the MAP installed on the extension connector is

referred to as the “upper” card. The MAP can be stacked on top of the DBM/DBX card

or may be installed by itself without any DBM/DBX card. The MAP is secured to the

main control processor card or to the memory interface extension connector of another

DBM/DBX card by threaded nylon spacers. The parts used to attach the spacer to the

main control processor card are listed below. The MAP assembly kit includes

additional parts. However, you only need to use the parts listed below.

Preparing for MAP Installation (or Removal)

1 Locate a desk or table top that will support 20 lb (9.1 kg). If the surface can be

damaged by sharp objects, place a protective sheet of cardboard or similar

material over the top surface.

2 Place an anti-static sheet over the desk or table top. (The card's plastic

shipping bag will suffice.)

3 Connect the static dissipating wrist strap connector to the cage and put on the

strap. See Safety Guidelines, page 1-19.

4 Remove the main control card as described in Removing the MCP-IPx2 Card,

page 2-17 or Removing the MEX-IP2 Card, page 2-57.

Control Card Installation Manual Application Cards 6-9

Page 206: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MAP

Car

d M

anag

emen

t App

licat

ions

Pla

tform

Car

d6

5 Place the main control card on the anti-static sheet.

6 Refer to the figures listed on the following page for a detailed view of the

MAP card installed onto the MCP-IPx2 and the MEX-IP2 card.

Installing the MAP Card

1 Verify that all assembly parts required to assemble the MAP card to the main

control card are available. See Table 6-5.

Table 6-5 Assembly Parts Used in MAP Assembly Kit

2 Refer to the following figures for detailed installation options of a MAP card

installed onto an MCP-IPx2 or a MEX-IP2 card:

MCP-IPx2 Cards Figure 2-13, MCP-IPx2 Card with MAP - Front View

Figure 2-14, MCP-IPx2 with DBM and MAP - Front View

Figure 2-18, MCP-IPx2 with DBX and MAP - Front View

Figure 2-19, Layout of DBM and MAP Card Assembled onto an MCP-IPx2 Card

MEX-IP2 Cards Figure 2-39, MEX-IP2 with MAP - Top View

Figure 2-40, Attaching the MAP Card onto a MEX-IP2 Card

Figure 2-41, MEX-IP2 with DBM and MAP - Top View

Figure 2-44, MEX-IP2 with DBX and MAP - Top View

Before removing the main control card from the Coral system, do the following:

•Perform the Database Binary Backup procedure.

•Verify that the database is not being backed up: check that the main control card

numeric status display does not read “P”. Data will be lost if power is removed from the

system when “P” is illuminated.

•Turn the Coral power supply OFF. The flash card could be damaged if the main control

card is removed when the system is powered.

Part Quantity

Female/female hex nylon spacer 15.9mm 4

Female/female hex nylon spacer 25.4mm 4

Male/female hex nylon spacer 6

Nylon screw 8

6-10 Application Cards Control Card Installation Manual

Page 207: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MAP

Car

d M

anag

emen

t App

licat

ions

Pla

tform

Car

d6

.................................................................................. Setting the MAP Card DIP Switches

The DIP switches on the right side of the MAP card configure the card to function

either the CoraLINK (CLA) and CNCM applications or with the CLA application,

only. Coral Main Software versions 11, 14, and 15 do not support the CNCM

application. Coral Main Software version 15.5 or higher does support the CNCM

application.

Table 6-6 displays the correct position of each DIP switch on the MAP card as a

function of the Coral software version installed. See Figure 6-1 for a description of the

DIP switches.

Table 6-6 Position of DIP Switches on MAP Card

To set the DIP switches:

Do one of the following:

For Coral versions 11 through 15.49, verify that all DIP switches are turned off

(downwards). See Figure 6-1.

For Coral versions 15.5 or higher and WG, verify that DIP switch #1 is turned

on (upwards) and that DIP switches #2 through #4 are turned off (downwards).

See Figure 6-1.

Coral VersionDIP Switch Position

1 2 3 4

11 OFF OFF OFF OFF

14 OFF OFF OFF OFF

15 OFF OFF OFF OFF

15.5or higher

ON OFF OFF OFF

WG ON OFF OFF OFF

Control Card Installation Manual Application Cards 6-11

Page 208: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MAP

Car

d M

anag

emen

t App

licat

ions

Pla

tform

Car

d6

.................................................................................. Configuring the MAP Card

The MAP card is configured by accessing the configuration page on the HTTP web

portal.

To configure the MAP card:

1 Open the web browser and enter the IP address of the MAP card in the

Address Box.

The Enter Network Password dialog box is displayed, prompting you to enter

your user name and password.

2 In the User Name field, enter Admin.In the Password field, enter 123456.

The Coral Web Designer page is displayed.

Displaying the Software Versions Installed on the MAP Card

To display the software version of applications installed on the MAP card, under the

Options heading, click INFO; the application information page is displayed, including

the software versions of the Application Manager, CNCM, CLA, and Web server. This

page is for display, only.

Figure 6-5 INFO page

6-12 Application Cards Control Card Installation Manual

Page 209: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MAP

Car

d M

anag

emen

t App

licat

ions

Pla

tform

Car

d6

Configuring the IP Parameters of the MAP Card

The IP Definitions page includes the TCP Port of every feature that gets sent to the

queue via the MAP card. Since all features except for SMDR are automatically

defined as Server, SMDR is the only parameter that is defined by the user. The SMDR

can be defined as Client or Server. When the SMDR feature is defined as a Client,

enter the server IP address in the corresponding field. See Table 6-7.

MAP Setup for Client Applications1 If the client is positioned on the other side of the firewall, verify that the NAT

settings of the TCP port have been configured as shown in Figure 6-6.

2 Define the server IP address on the application side.

Server Application Setup1 Select a specific terminal from the server terminals group.

2 Define IP address and IP port of the application.

3 Set an application destination for the selected terminal.

Figure 6-6 IP Definitions Page

Control Card Installation Manual Application Cards 6-13

Page 210: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MAP

Car

d M

anag

emen

t App

licat

ions

Pla

tform

Car

d6

Configuring the SMDR Report TCP/IP Destinations

SMDR Report destinations are defined as a TCP/IP sockets when the CNCM

application is used.

1 In the Coral PI database, define the SMDR_DEST parameter as 99(Route: SMDR, 0). Coral displays the last IP port not yet used. See Chapter 14

of the Coral Program Interface and Database manual.

2 In the Coral PI database, you can define the SMDR_BACKUP parameter as 0

(Route: SIZ). This releases the SMDR memory allocated by Coral that is not

utilized by the CNCM application.

3 In the CNCM application, in the IP Definitions page (see Figure 6-6), define

the SMDR mode as Server or Client; Table 6-7 describes the SMDR field

entries for both modes.

SMDR Server, the application can send SMDR reports to one TCP/IP

socket destination, only.

SMDR Client, the application can send SMDR reports to up to two TCP/IP

socket destinations. This provides additional redundancy as SMDR output is

sent to two different devices simultaneously.

4 Configure the parameters as specified in Table 6-7 and click Apply; the SMDR

application is configured to send records to one or two different TCP/IP

sockets.

Table 6-7 SMDR Destination Configuration Possibilities

Field Enabled in Mode Entry

Client Server

Server IP Address Yes No IP address of first SMDR destination

TCP Port Yes Yes TCP port of first SMDR destination*

* This default TCP/IP port is automatically defined as 11007 by the CNCM application but can be modified if necessary.

Secondary Server IP Address

Yes No IP address of second SMDR destination

Secondary TCP Port Yes No TCP port of second SMDR destination

6-14 Application Cards Control Card Installation Manual

Page 211: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MAP

Car

d M

anag

emen

t App

licat

ions

Pla

tform

Car

d6

.................................................................................. Upgrading the MAP Card

The MAP software is regularly enhanced to provide new features. You can upgrade

the MAP application by downloading its latest version from the manufacturer’s

website.

The package installed on the PUGW, PUGWipx, and MAP cards, and the Coral IPx Office and Wave Gateway systems are identical. The application components used by each product are listed in Table 6-8.

Table 6-8 C/PUGW Software Components

.

C/PUGW Software

Components

Applicable Via

MRC module

PUGW card

PUGWipx card

IPx Office

MAP card

Wave Gateway

CLA — — — l l —

CNCM — — — l l l

DTMF (DTR) red. l — — — — —

Media channels l — — — — —

MFC-2 (MFR) red. l — — — — —

NIC — — — — — l

SeaMail — — — l — —

UGW signaling l l l — —

Web admin. l l l l l l

Control Card Installation Manual Application Cards 6-15

Page 212: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MAP

Car

d M

anag

emen

t App

licat

ions

Pla

tform

Car

d6

Upgrading the PUGW Application Version

1 Download the latest MAP version from the manufacturer’s website.

a Access the manufacturer’s website at http://www.tadirantele.com.

b Go to Partners login, type your username and password.

c Click Enter. The Main Partners page is displayed.

d Go to Support > Cards and download the C/PUGW version.

2 Upload the file to the TFTP server and verify that the server is working.

(TFTP Server, located on a server on the same LAN as the MAP).

3 Do one of the following:

For connections made directly to the Coral, connect an RJ-45 crossover

cable between the MAP card and the workstation. See Figure 6-7 and

Figure 6-8.

For connections to the MAP card via the LAN, attach an ordinary cable

from the workstation to a LAN outlet. See Figure 6-7.

Figure 6-7 MAP Workstation Connection

Figure 6-8 MAP RJ-45 Crossover Cable

4 From the Coral Programming Interface (PI), access the IP General menu

(Route: IP,3), and reconfigure the following MAP parameters to values that

can be reached by the workstation:

Ethernet crossover cable

OrdinaryEthernetCable

OrdinaryEthernetCable

Coral System

Coral SystemLAN

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

RJ-45RJ-45

6-16 Application Cards Control Card Installation Manual

Page 213: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MAP

Car

d M

anag

emen

t App

licat

ions

Pla

tform

Car

d6

a Reconfigure the MAP: IP_ADDRESS.

b Reconfigure the MAP: SUBNET_MASK.

c Reconfigure the MAP: DEFAULT_ROUTER_ADDRESS.

d Change the IP address information, by entering Y to MAP: UPDATE MAPs IP parameters (Y/N).

For more information, refer to Chapter 29 of the Program Interface and

Database Reference Manual.

5 If the workstation is configured to an assigned static IP address, record the IP

address on a piece of paper.

6 Temporarily assign a static IP address to your workstation that is on the same

IP subnet as the IP address configured in Step 4.

7 Enter the name of the MAP software upgrade file into the File Name field.

8 Enter the IP address of the TFTP server into the TFTP server IP Address

field.

9 Click Start Upgrade; the application is upgraded.

10 Refresh the web browser and verify that the upgraded application is displayed

in the Upgrade Success field, along with the time and date of the upgrade.

11 If applicable, reconfigure the workstation to accept the IP address recorded in

Step 6.

Figure 6-9 MAP Upgrade Status Page

Control Card Installation Manual Application Cards 6-17

Page 214: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MAP

Car

d M

anag

emen

t App

licat

ions

Pla

tform

Car

d6

.................................................................................. Removing the MAP Card

1 Disconnect the RJ-45 connector from the MAP card on the Coral main cage or

shelf.

2 Repeat the procedure outlined in Preparing for MAP Installation (or Removal),

page 6-9

3 Remove the nylon machine screws that secure the MAP card to the standoff

spacers on the main control processor card. Set the screws aside.

4 Place the main control processor card on the flat surface with the component

side facing upwards.

5 Place thumbs on the main control processor card, on either side of the MAP

near the front side of the main control processor card. Use your fingers to lift

the edge of the MAP card on both sides, gently disengaging the multi-pin

connector on the MAP from the main control processor card or DBM/DBX

connector.

6-18 Application Cards Control Card Installation Manual

Page 215: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MAP

Car

d M

anag

emen

t App

licat

ions

Pla

tform

Car

d6

.................................................................................. Network Connections (RJ-45)

Connection to the LAN

The front panel of the MAP module contains an RJ-45 adapter for connection to the

LAN. The MAP is designed to operate over Ethernet LAN with a connection of less

than 100 meters to the local switch or computer network when using Category 5 UTP

(unshielded twisted pair) in accordance with the 10/100Base-T protocol.

Interface Connections

The following table shows the interface connections of the pins on the MAP RJ-45

connectors.

Table 6-9 MAP Interface Connections (DTE)

Routing the LAN Cables

The RJ-45 LAN cable is routed from the front panel of the MAP card. See Connecting

the LAN/RS-232 Cables to MAP/CLA/LIU/KB0, page 1-25.

Pin # Function

1 Tx(+)

2 Tx(-)

3 Rx(+)

4 not used

5 not used

6 Rx(-)

7 not used

8 not used

Control Card Installation Manual Application Cards 6-19

Page 216: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MAP

Car

d M

anag

emen

t App

licat

ions

Pla

tform

Car

d6

.................................................................................. Database Programming

The installation of a MAP card to a Coral system affects the system database. Consult

the Program Interface Reference Manual for instructions on the database

programming required when installing a MAP card. The following are the parameters

which may be set:

The MAP card itself does not require any authorization. However, the management

applications such as CVD, CFM and the CLA require their regular authorization in the

Coral.

Parameters Applied to CLA application (Coral software version 11 or higher)

Feature Authorization__________________________________ (Route: FEAT,1)

This display-only parameters display the CLA feature that is authorized for use with

this Coral system.

CoraLINKEnables the CLA card operation when set to Yes.

CoraLINK ______________________________________________ (Route: ROOT,7)

For further information, refer to Chapter 27 in the Program Interface Reference

Manual.

Parameters Applied to CNCM application (Coral software version 15.5 or higher)

Refer to Chapter 3 of the Program Interface and Database Reference Manual for

instructions on the database programming required.

Feature Authorization__________________________________ (Route: FEAT,1)

This display-only parameters display the CNCM features that are authorized for use

with this Coral system.

SMDR BACKUPProvides the system with a memory buffer for storage of SMDR on-line records

whenever the printer or log device are unable to accept records. For information on

SMDR database programming, see Chapter 14 in the Program Interface Reference

Manual.

6-20 Application Cards Control Card Installation Manual

Page 217: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MAP

Car

d M

anag

emen

t App

licat

ions

Pla

tform

Car

d6

HOTEL/MOTELDetermines whether the following features are accessible when set to Yes:

Wakeup

Call Charge.

TRAFFIC (CVT)Enables the installation of the Traffic Application Package: CoralVIEW Traffic

(CVT).

CALL TRACEMalicious Call Trace (MCT) allows the Called Party or an Attendant to compile a list

of all incoming calls to the “Called” station. The Attendant can compile a list for more

than one station.

CVAWhen set to Yes, this parameter enables access to the Coral View Administrator (CVA)

Application. The CVA is mostly used by entry-level operators and supervisors.

CVDWhen set to Yes, this parameter enables access to the Coral View Designer (CVD)

Application.

CVD_PRO.When set to Yes, this parameter enables access to the Coral View Designer Pro.

Application.

CFMAuthorizes the system to send diagnostic and alarms messages to the CFM

application.

INTERNAL TRAFFICThis parameter must be set to Yes to enable the Coral to produce internal traffic

reports.

Control Card Installation Manual Application Cards 6-21

Page 218: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MAP

Car

d M

anag

emen

t App

licat

ions

Pla

tform

Car

d6

IP, General ________________________________________________ (Route: IP,3)

MAP: IP_ADDRESSEnter the IP Address for the MAP card.

MAP: SUBNET_MASKEnter the Subnet Mask IP Address for the MAP card.

MAP: DEFAULT_ROUTEREnter the Default Router IP Address for the MAP card.

MAP: UPDATE MAP IP Parameters?Updating the MAP IP Address causes the card to initialize, thereby interrupting the

connection to all the applications hosted by the MAP, which might cause the

applications to initialize as well.

MAP _______________________________________________________(Root, 3, 10)

Refer to Chapter 27 of the Program Interface and Database Reference Manual for instructions on the database programming required.

MAP cardDisplays the status of the MAP card.

CNCMDisplays the status of the CNCM application that runs on the MAP card and offers

terminal IP connectivity between external applications and the Coral system.

MAP Card Reset?Allows updating the MAP card software. When updating the MAP, all applications

connected via the MAP, are affected and might not operate properly.

6-22 Application Cards Control Card Installation Manual

Page 219: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MAP

Car

d M

anag

emen

t App

licat

ions

Pla

tform

Car

d6

CNCM Supports IP Coral destinations

Currently, the Coral can define IP connections for these destinations by entering the

“99” string as the destination port number. In this manner, an IP connection can be

established for the application (via CNCM software in the MAP) when MAP is in

“ACTIVE” status for the Coral system.

PI destination parameters appear in the following branches and are assigned the

following default TCP/IP ports as described in Table 6-10.

STIP is no longer required for the CFM or any other application requiring an IP connection. The LIU card for the PI’s IP connectivity is also replaced by the CNCM’s IP connectivity.

Table 6-10 MAP Application Default Port assignment for IP Socket

Application Name

PI Branch Name

Root Parameter Name

Default TCP Port for

IP Socket*

* These IP port numbers can be changed in the MAP application software.

Wakeup Wakeup Control

Wakeup, 0 DEST 11001

Charge SMDR Control SMDR, 0 CHARGE_DEST 11002

MCT Call Trace Terminal

Root, 3, 6 Call Trace Terminal

11003

CVD NA NA NA 11004

CFM NA NA NA 11015

Traffic CVT Terminal Dest

Root, 3, 5 Traffic_Terminal# 11006

SMDR SMDR Control SMDR, 0 SMDR_DEST 11007

DI_ALAR Terminal Destination

MSG, 2, 2 DIAG 11008

HI_STIM Terminal Destination

MSG, 2, 2 STIMU 11009

Program Interface†

† Coral Database Binary Backup and ASCII are NOT supported via MAP card.

Terminal Setup Term, 0 TERM(INAL) 11010

Control Card Installation Manual Application Cards 6-23

Page 220: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MAP

Car

d M

anag

emen

t App

licat

ions

Pla

tform

Car

d6

.................................................................................. MAP Maintenance (COM1 RS-232 Port)

MAP maintenance is performed with a PC connected to the COM1 port on the front

panel of the MAP card. The workstation connected to the MAP card must include an

RS-232 connector. The workstation connected to the MAP card must include an

RS232 connector and be capable of terminal emulation.

MAP card maintenance includes certain troubleshooting actions that are carried out by the Manufacturer’s representative, only. Incorrect use of these commands could result in system disruption.

RS-232 Pinout

The pinout of the RS-232 connector connected to COM1 is displayed in Table 6-11.

Table 6-11 MAP RS-232 Pin Connections

COM1 Default Port Settings

The default COM1 port settings are as follows:

Baud rate - 115,200

Parity - none

Data bit - 8

Stop bits - 1

Pin # Function

1 not used

2 Receive Data

3 Transmit Data

4 not used

5 GND

6 not used

7 not used

8 not used

6-24 Application Cards Control Card Installation Manual

Page 221: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MAP

Car

d M

anag

emen

t App

licat

ions

Pla

tform

Car

d6

.................................................................................. Specifications - MAP

Network Type:............................................ IEEE 802.3 Ethernet

Network Topology: .................................... 10/100Base-T

Network Interface Connector:.................... RJ-45

Network Transport Protocol:...................... TCP/IP (BSD 4.3 socket Interface)

Coral Common Control (Mother Board): .. MEX-IP2, MCP-IPx2, MEX-IP, MCP-IPx

Processor: ................................................... Intel xScale IXP42x

Shared Ram: ............................................... 1MB

Onboard Flash Memory: ............................ 16MB

SDRAM: .................................................... 128MB

RS-232: ...................................................... For developers & debug only

Min. Software Version

CoraLINK (CLA) applications: ................. Coral IPx/FlexiCom version 11

CNCM applications:................................... Coral IPx/FlexiCom version 15.5

Wave Gateway: .......................................... Coral Wave Gateway version 1

For CoraLINK (CLA) mode, only

Application Interface:................................. Complies with ECMA 179, ECMA 180, and ECMA 269 phase 3 standards (CSTA III)

Access Protocol:......................................... ITU X.217/X.227 (ACSE), X.219/X.229 (ROSE)

Control Card Installation Manual Application Cards 6-25

Page 222: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

MAP

Car

d M

anag

emen

t App

licat

ions

Pla

tform

Car

d6

NOTES:

6-26 Application Cards Control Card Installation Manual

Page 223: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

C

6.2

ontrol Card Installation Manua

CLA CardCoraLINK Adapter Card

CLA

Car

d C

oraL

INK

Adap

ter C

ard

6

.................................................................................. General Description

0

Coral Components Discontinuation Announcement: CLA 386, CLA 486, and F-CLA 686 have been discontinued. MAP cards replace the discontinued CLA cards, which are no longer produced. See page 6-1.

The CLA (CoraLINK Adapter) appears in various configurations:

CLA 386 (10Base-2 via Coax)

CLA 486 (10Base-T via RJ-45)

F-CLA 686 (10/100Base-T via RJ-45) with a Compact Flash memory card

The CLA cards are shown in Figure 6-10 and Figure 6-11.

The CoraLINK is a Computer-Telephony Integration (CTI) Link for the Coral system

that provides an Open Architecture Interface (OAI) to the call processing and

management circuitry. CoraLINK enables external computer applications to monitor

call activity, and establish, manipulate, and disconnect calls through the Coral system.

Coral systems installed with the CLA card enable the system to function as a universal

communications switching platform for specialized communications applications.

The CoraLINK OAI interface enables connection of the Coral's control circuits to an

external Ethernet LAN computer network.

The CoraLINK module is physically connected to the Coral's control system and

provides an Ethernet 10/100Base-T via RJ-45 output connector for interfacing with

the external computer network.

CoraLINK is implemented by installing a CLA card “piggy-back” as a daughterboard

on the main control processor card. The CLA is installed on the memory expansion

connector on the main control processor card. Refer to the CoraLINK Reference

Manual and Coral FlexiCom & Coral IPx Product Description for detailed information

on the CLA.

The CLA module is composed of a base card and two mini modules mounted on it.

l Application Cards 6-27

Page 224: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

CLA

Car

d C

oraL

INK

Adap

ter C

ard

6

The CLA module provides the physical connection, through the J-BUS, to the main

control processor card, the call processor of the Coral system, and provides the front

panel RJ-45 connection to the network. Its front panel also contains a LED indicator,

which when lit indicates that the CLA card is active and properly working, a reset push

button and an RS-232 COM port.

The CoraLINK software is contained in two different cards: IMC8 / IMC16 and CLA.

The CLA contains the memory required for the card’s software and the shared memory

used for information transfer on the bus interface circuit.

Figure 6-10 CLA 486 Card

RST

LED

CO

M 1

LINE10Base-T

CoraLINKCLA

NOTE: The wire must befacing the outside, awayfrom the PCB, with thewhite dot visible.

PC104BUS

CoreModule 486MiniModule/

Ethernet

MountingHole

RJ-45 NetworkInterfaceEthernet

10Base-T

LED

MaintenanceRS-232 Port

Reset Pushbutton

Status Indicator

Maintenance DIP Switches(Always Set To The Right

for Normal Operation)

LANCable

RS-232 Cable MountingHole

MountingHole

6-28 Application Cards Control Card Installation Manual

Page 225: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

CLA

Car

d C

oraL

INK

Adap

ter C

ard

6

Figure 6-11 F-CLA 686 Card

The DIP switches located on the component side of the CLA can be set to the

following modes:

All the switches “Right” provides the mode for the normal working condition

of the CLA card.

Switches 1 through 3 “Left”, provides the debug mode. This mode is used

during software installation or for the use of technicians for software

debugging.

Table 6-12 CLA Card Front Panel Components

RST

LED

CO

M 1

LINE100Base-T

CoraLINKFCLA

PC104BUS

CFCLA Module

LAN Cable MountingHole

MountingHole

IDE Bus

RJ-45 NetworkInterface Ethernet

10/100Base-T

LED

MaintenanceRS-232 Port

Reset Pushbutton

Status Indicator

Maintenance DIP Switches(Always Set To The Right

for Normal Operation)

CompactFlash Disk

(CFD)memory

NOTE: The wire must face the outside, awayfrom the PCB, withthe white dot visible.

RS-232 CableMountingHole

CFD

CoreModule 686

Component Description

Green LED indicates that the CLA card is active and properly working when lit

Reset button causes the CLA to drop all CTI calls and resets the card. The card automatically reestablishes a network connection

COM1 Connection

Maintenance RS-232 port (for debugging, see CLA Maintenance (COM1 RS-232 Port), page 6-38)

LINE Connection RJ-45 Ethernet interface

Control Card Installation Manual Application Cards 6-29

Page 226: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

CLA

Car

d C

oraL

INK

Adap

ter C

ard

6

CLA Functional Block Diagram

The functional block diagram is shown in Figure 6-12 and Figure 6-13.

The Ethernet Network Interface (LAN Communication Controller) is an adapter for

interconnecting the system with the Ethernet LAN external computer network. The

CoreModule 32-bit CPU compatible incorporates the elements of a PC compatible

computer and provides the processing power needed to control the CoraLINK adapter.

The CLA base card contains a PC104 BUS to interconnect the mini modules. The

PC104 BUS is electrically identical to the ISA BUS.

The communication in this configuration is controlled by an intelligent CPU

controller. The communications software and part of the application software is run on

the card by the local CPU and is not loaded to the main control processor card.

The base card contains a 256 Kbyte static RAM memory, shared between the CLA and

the main control processor card. The shared memory is accessed from the CLA card

via the PC104 BUS and via the J-bus from the main control processor card.

In the CLA 486 card, the 2MB flash memory EPROM on the base card contains the

card's software, which is burnt into memory during the regular software installation

procedure. The flash stores code for the card's program. The flash EPROM is

connected to the PC104 BUS.

In the CLA 686 card, the CFD (Compact Flash Disk) memory on the CFCLA mini

module contains the CLA card's software and programming code, which is factory

loaded. The CFD is connected to the PC104 BUS via the IDE BUS.

The CLA card also contains an NMI/watchdog circuit, providing a reset signal to the

CoreModule if it detects a failure in the software cycle.

The communication protocol implemented in the network is TCP/IP. The connection

to the computer network is made with an RJ-45 connector type in accordance with the

10/100Base-T protocol and is located on the front panel of the CLA base card.

6-30 Application Cards Control Card Installation Manual

Page 227: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

CLA

Car

d C

oraL

INK

Adap

ter C

ard

6

Figure 6-12 CLA 486 Card - Functional Block Diagram

Figure 6-13 F-CLA 686 Card - Functional Block Diagram

UNIVERSALCOMPUTER

CARD

ETHERNETNETWORKINTERFACE

2MBFLASHEPROM

PC104 BUSSUPPORT

CoralMain Control

Processor Card

CoraLINK Circuitry

256kBSHARED

DUAL-PORTRAM

8MB DRAM 32-BITCPU

Coral System

MAINCONTROLLER

MEMORY

ISA BUS

MEMORYBUS

ETHERNET10Base-TNETWORK

9-PIND-TYPE RS-232for cardconfiguration

CO

M 1

RJ-45

486

PC104BUS

UNIVERSALCOMPUTER

CARD

PC104 BUSSUPPORT

Main ControlProcessor

Card

CoraLINK Circuitry

256kBSHARED

DUAL-PORTRAM

64MB SDRAM 32-BITCPU

Coral System

MAINCONTROLLER

MEMORY

ISA BUS

MEMORYBUS

ETHERNET10/100Base-TNETWORK

9-PIND-TYPE RS-232for cardconfiguration

CO

M 1

RJ-45

686

ETHERNETNETWORKINTERFACE

FLASHDISKCARD

IDEBUS

Control Card Installation Manual Application Cards 6-31

Page 228: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

CLA

Car

d C

oraL

INK

Adap

ter C

ard

6

.................................................................................. Installing the CLA Card

This section details the CoraLINK Adapter (CLA) hardware installation procedure.

The hardware installation procedure necessitates shutting off the Coral input power, which halts all normal system call processing and disconnects all calls in progress. If this procedure is performed on an existing installation that is processing calls, do it when least disruption to call traffic is likely.

The CoraLINK hardware for the Coral system consists of a CLA card mounted on the

main control processor card. Installing the CLA card is a quick and simple process

requiring a small flat head screwdriver. The CLA does not occupy a card slot within

the Coral system. Rather, it is installed as a daughterboard onto a memory connector

on the main control processor card. Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-31 display the location of

the interface connector on the main control cards.

Unlike the expansion memory card, the CLA card is not equipped with an extension

connector on the top side. The main control card bus interface connector can support

two expansion memory cards or one expansion card and one CLA card, by stacking

one card onto the connector of another expansion memory card. When a CLA card is

installed in the extension connector of another expansion memory card, the expansion

memory card installed on the main control processor card is referred to as the “lower”

card, and the CLA installed on the extension connector is referred to as the “upper”

card. The CLA can be stacked on top of the expansion card or may be installed as the

lower card without any expansion card. The CLA is secured to the main control

processor card or to the memory interface extension connector of another expansion

card by threaded nylon spacers. See the following for various installation options:

Figure 2-15, MCP-IPx2 with DBM and CLA - Front View

Figure 2-16, MCP-IPx2 with CLA - Front View

Figure 2-17, MCP-IPx2 with DBX and CLA - Front View

Figure 2-20, MCP-IPx2 Card with CLA and DBM - Layout

Figure 2-21, MCP-IPx2 Card with CLA and DBX - Layout

Figure 2-35, MEX-IP2 with CLA - Top View

Figure 2-42, MEX-IP2 with DBM and CLA - Top View

Figure 2-43, MEX-IP2 with DBX and CLA - Top View

Figure 2-46, MEX-IP2 Card with CLA and DBM - Layout

Figure 2-47, MEX-IP2 Card with CLA and DBX - Layout

6-32 Application Cards Control Card Installation Manual

Page 229: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

CLA

Car

d C

oraL

INK

Adap

ter C

ard

6

Preparing for CLA Installation (or Removal)

1 Locate a desk or table top that will support 20 lb (9.1 kg). If the surface can be

damaged by sharp objects, place a protective sheet of cardboard or similar

material over the top surface.

2 Place an anti-static sheet over the desk or table top. (The card's plastic

shipping bag will suffice.)

3 Connect the static dissipating wrist strap connector to the cage and put on the

strap. See Safety Guidelines, page 1-19.

4 Remove the main control card as described in one of the following:

Removing the MCP-IPx2 Card, page 2-17

Removing the MEX-IP2 Card, page 2-57

5 Place the main control card on the anti-static sheet.

Installing the CLA Card

1 If an expansion memory card (DBM or DBX) is installed, skip to Step 3.

Install three type A spacers provided with the CLA card into the three

mounting holes on the main control processor card. See Figure 2-2 for the

MCP-IPx2 and Figure 2-31 for the MEX-IP2.

2 Remove the three nylon screws threaded into the top of the three standoff

spacers if you have not already done so, and save them for further use. Refer

to Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-31 for the location of the memory interface

connector on the main control processor cards.

3 If the CLA is to be stacked over another DBX expansion memory card, install

the four spacers (two of each, types A and B) provided with the CLA, into the

two mounting holes on the main control processor card to secure the CLA.

Before removing the main control card from the Coral system, do the following:

1.Perform the Database Binary Backup procedure.

2.Verify that the database is not being backed up: check that the main control card

numeric status display does not read “P”. Data will be lost if power is removed from

the system when “P” is illuminated.

3.Turn the Coral power supply OFF. The flash card could be damaged if the main control

card is removed when the system is powered.

Control Card Installation Manual Application Cards 6-33

Page 230: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

CLA

Car

d C

oraL

INK

Adap

ter C

ard

6

4 Carefully align the multi-pin plug on the bottom of the CLA card with the

mating connector on the main control processor card, or on the extension

connector of the "lower" expansion memory card.

5 Gently but firmly press the CLA plug into the main control processor card or

the DBX connector until the CLA card rests on the nylon spacers. A slight

resistance will be felt as the connectors engage.

6 Reinsert the nylon screws through the mounting holes of the CLA card and

thread the screws into the nylon spacers until snug.

7 For F-CLA 686 card type, if not already inserted, insert the appropriate CLA

compact flash memory disk (CFD) into the drive on the CFCLA mini module.

See Figure 6-11.

8 Verify that all slide switches (on the CLA right side) are set to OFF (right).

9 Install the main control processor card as described on Chapter 2, Main

Control Processor Cards.

Verify that the pins of the CLA plug are aligned with the pin sockets of the main control

processor card or the expansion connector.

Do not over-tighten the nylon screws or they may be damaged.

6-34 Application Cards Control Card Installation Manual

Page 231: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

CLA

Car

d C

oraL

INK

Adap

ter C

ard

6

.................................................................................. Removing the CLA Card

1 Disconnect the RJ-45 connector from the CLA card on the Coral main cage or

shelf.

2 Repeat the procedure outlined in Preparing for CLA Installation (or Removal),

page 6-33.

3 Remove the nylon machine screws that secure the CLA card to the standoff

spacers on the main control processor card. Set the screws aside.

4 Place the main control processor card on the flat surface with the component

side facing upwards.

5 Place thumbs on the main control processor card, on either side of the CLA

near the front side of the main control processor card. Use your fingers to lift

the edge of the CLA card on both sides, gently disengaging the multi-pin

connector on the CLA from the main control processor card or DBX

connector.

Control Card Installation Manual Application Cards 6-35

Page 232: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

CLA

Car

d C

oraL

INK

Adap

ter C

ard

6

.................................................................................. Network Connections (RJ-45)

Connection to the LAN

The front panel of the CLA module contains an RJ-45 adapter for connection to the

Ethernet computer network. The CLA is designed to operate over Ethernet LAN with

a connection of less than 100 meters to the local switch or computer network when

using Category 5 UTP (unshielded twisted pair), in accordance with the 10/100Base-T

protocol.

Interface Connections

The following table shows the interface connections of the pins on the CLA RJ-45

connectors.

Table 6-13 CLA Interface Connections (DTE)

Routing the LAN Cables

The RJ-45 LAN cable is routed from the front panel of the CLA card. See Connecting the LAN/RS-232 Cables to MAP/CLA/LIU/KB0, page 1-25. s

Pin # Function

1 Tx(+)

2 Tx(-)

3 Rx(+)

4 not used

5 not used

6 Rx(-)

7 not used

8 not used

6-36 Application Cards Control Card Installation Manual

Page 233: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

CLA

Car

d C

oraL

INK

Adap

ter C

ard

6

.................................................................................. Database Programming

The installation of a CLA card into a Coral system affects the system database.

Consult the Program Interface Reference Manual for instructions on the database

programming required when installing a CLA card. The following are the parameters

which may be set:

General System Parameters Applied to CLA

Feature Authorization ___________________________________ (Route: FEAT,1)This display-only parameters display the features that are authorized for use with this Coral system.

CoraLINK

Enables the CLA card operation when set to Yes.

CoraLINK _______________________________________________(Route: ROOT,7)For further information, refer to Chapter 27 in the Program Interface Reference Manual.

Control Card Installation Manual Application Cards 6-37

Page 234: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

CLA

Car

d C

oraL

INK

Adap

ter C

ard

6

.................................................................................. CLA Maintenance (COM1 RS-232 Port)

CLA maintenance is performed with a PC connected to the COM1 port on the front

panel of the CLA card. The RS-232 COM1 maintenance port allows you to execute

debugging commands as described in Table 6-15. The PC connected to the CLA card

must include an RS-232 connector that is capable of terminal emulation.

CLA card maintenance includes certain troubleshooting actions that are carried out by a representative of the manufacturer, only. Incorrect use of these commands could result in system disruption. For further information, see the CoraLink Installation Procedure & Hardware and Software Reference Manual.

RS-232 Pin Connections

The minimum pin connections of the RS-232 connector connected to COM1 are

displayed in Table 6-14.

Table 6-14 CLA RS-232 Pin Connections

COM1 Default Port Settings

The default COM1 port settings are as follows:

Baud rate - 19,200

Parity - none

Data bit - 8

Stop bits - 1

Pin # Function

1 not used

2 Receive Data

3 Transmit Data

4 not used

5 GND

6 not used

7 not used

8 not used

6-38 Application Cards Control Card Installation Manual

Page 235: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

CLA

Car

d C

oraL

INK

Adap

ter C

ard

6

CLA Maintenance Troubleshooting Commands

Table 6-15 displays some of the commands used to debug the FCLA card. A terminal

emulator must be opened prior to debugging.

Table 6-15 CLA Troubleshooting Functions via COM1

Command What it Does

c0 Disables messages to the screen. Before closing the terminal, this function must be entered. If this function is not entered before closing the terminal, the CLA card will initialize. Enter c0 before entering c3.

c3 Activates messages to the screen

br3 Changes the baud rate. When you enter this command, the terminal will cease to function until the terminal baud rate is updated.

m Displays the free memory on the CLA card.

ci Displays the following:

Number of Empty calls id

Number of Occupied calls id

Number of DCCLA - The number of corrective software actions performed by the card. A functioning CLA card should read “0”.

cs Displays statistical information. This command is entered twice, with an interval of 30 seconds between each command entry. The information displayed includes the time it took to run the test and how many messages were read to and from the Coral system per second and per hour.

v Displays CLA card software version

d Displays the date

o Indicates whether there has been an overflow of information from the Coral system to the CLA card.

Control Card Installation Manual Application Cards 6-39

Page 236: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

CLA

Car

d C

oraL

INK

Adap

ter C

ard

6

.................................................................................. Coral Link Adapter Application

In Coral CTI applications, CoraLINK is connected to the Ethernet backbone along

with the telephony server, as shown in Figure 6-14.

The CoraLink acts as an interface between the Coral system and any CTI server

application for all the services (call, transfer, etc.) and events (monitoring functions)

of the network. The CTI application together with the CTI telephony server

manipulate numerous different call commands from the agent network and translate

them into logical data. The CTI telephony server communicates with the CoraLINK

through a single connection. The CoraLINK then translates that data into logical

information for the Coral system, which processes the calls.

CoraLINK can support eight concurrent different multiple CTI applications on the

network, any or all of which may be simultaneously directing service requests to, and

receiving status events at any time.

CoraLINK uses TCP/IP protocol, complies with the Complies with ECMA 179,

ECMA 180, and ECMA 269 phase 3 standards (CSTA III). CoraLINK also supports

the Novell TSAPI protocol, the Intel Dialogic CT-connect, and IBM’s Callpath.

The CLA should be accompanied by an appropriate software application. Please contact the manufacturer for the required CTI application and/or price list. See Chapter 2 in the Coral FlexiCom & Coral IPx Product Description, for more details.

6-40 Application Cards Control Card Installation Manual

Page 237: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

CLA

Car

d C

oraL

INK

Adap

ter C

ard

6

Figure 6-14 CoraLINK Application Telephony Server

Any Telephony Server (e.g. FlexCT server,

CallPath,CT Connect,

TSAPI,up to 8 connections).

IVRServer

CTI Clients

LAN

Server

Computers with CTI applications

TCP/IP

.

.

.

Ethernet 10/100Base-T RJ-45

Control Card Installation Manual Application Cards 6-41

Page 238: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

CLA

Car

d C

oraL

INK

Adap

ter C

ard

6

.................................................................................. Specifications - CLA

CLA 486

Application Interface:................................. Complies with Complies with ECMA 179, ECMA 180, and ECMA 269 phase 3 standards (CSTA III)

Access Protocol:......................................... ITU X.217/X.227 (ACSE), X.219/X.229 (ROSE)

Network Type:............................................ IEEE 802.3 Ethernet

Network Topology: .................................... 10Base-T

Network Interface Connector:.................... RJ-45

Flash Memory: ........................................... 2 MB EPROM

Network Transport Protocol:...................... TCP/IP (BSD 4.3 socket Interface)

Coral Common Control (Mother Board): .. MEX-IP2, MCP-IPx2, MEX-IP, MCP-IPx, MCP-IPsl

F-CLA 686

Application Interface:................................. Complies with Complies with ECMA 179, ECMA 180, and ECMA 269 phase 3 standards (CSTA III)

Access Protocol:......................................... ITU X.217/X.227 (ACSE), X.219/X.229 (ROSE)

Network Type:............................................ IEEE 802.3 Ethernet

Network Topology: .................................... 10/100Base-T

Network Interface Connector:.................... RJ-45

Flash Memory: ........................................... 32, 64 MB Compact Flash Disk

Network Transport Protocol:...................... TCP/IP (BSD 4.3 socket Interface)

Coral Common Control:............................. MEX-IP2, MCP-IPx2, MEX-IP, MCP-IPx, MCP-IPsl

6-42 Application Cards Control Card Installation Manual

Page 239: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Control Card Installation Manual

Chapter

7

LAN Interface Unit (LIU)

7.1 About the LIU........................................................................7-1

7.2 Installing the LIU Card ..........................................................7-7

7.3 Configuring the LIU Card ....................................................7-13

7.4 Specifications - LIU.............................................................7-29

Page 240: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

7

Coral Components Discontinuation Announcement: LIU card has been discontinued. MAP cards replace thediscontinued LIU cards, which are no longer produced. See page 6-1.

7-0 LAN Interface Unit (LIU) Control Card Installation Manual

Page 241: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

C

7.1

ontrol Card Installation Manua

About the LIU(Installed on MCP-IPx2 and MEX-IP2 Cards)

Abou

t the

LIU

(Ins

talle

d on

MC

P-IP

x2 a

nd M

EX-IP

2 C

ards

)7

.................................................................................. General Description

This section describes the LAN Interface Unit (LIU), used by the MCP-IPx2 and

MEX-IP2 control cards. See Figure 7-1.

When PI (Program Interface) connection over IP is supported by the MAP card, the LIU no longer needed.

The LIU card is for use in the following control cards and systems:

Table 7-1 LIU cards, Coral Systems & Control Cards Compatibility

Card Function

The LIU card enables the MCP-IPx2 and the MEX-IP2 main control processor card to

communicate with the PI (Program Interface) over IP. Without this card,

communication via the RJ-45 connector cannot take place, and all interaction with the

PI must occur via the KB0 RS-232 port (unless a MAP card is installed. When a MAP

Control Card Type

CDRS Coral FlexiCom Coral IPx

200

200

E

200

300

400

V

400

500

0

500

800

300

0

Off

ice

MCP-IPx — — — — — — — — — — —

MCP-IPx2 *

* In Coral FlexiCom 200 and CDRS 200, 200E there is no hole at top panel for the LAN connector.

— — — — — — — — — —

MEX-IP — — — — — — — — — — —

MEX-IP2 — — — — —

MSB Office — — — — — — — — — — —

l LAN Interface Unit (LIU) 7-1

Page 242: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Abou

t the

LIU

(Ins

talle

d on

MC

P-IP

x2 a

nd M

EX-IP

2 C

ards

)7

card is installed, communication via the RJ-45 connector can take place and the LIU

card is redundant).

The LIU card translates the RS-232 protocol used by the KB0 to the IP protocol. In

order for the LIU to function, it is necessary to move DIP switch #1 on the front panel

of the MCP-IPx2 and the MEX-IP2 cards to the left.

Figure 7-1 LIU Card Layout

Card Features

The LIU also includes LED indicators that indicate whether the channel is idle or

active.

070 - 116070EDBFA

Connectorsto MainControlProcessorCard

Reset pushbuttonDo not press

CON 3

CO

N 1

Holes forfasteningLIU card

Upper View Lower View

LEDindicators

1234

No. LED Description Status Meaning

1 Green (Left) Serial port

On Channel is idle

Flashing Channel is connected to network and is active

2 Yellow Diagnostics N/A Not Used

3 Red Serial Port 2 N/A Not Used

4 Green (Right) Network (LAN)On LAN port is connected

to the network

7-2 LAN Interface Unit (LIU) Control Card Installation Manual

Page 243: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Abou

t the

LIU

(Ins

talle

d on

MC

P-IP

x2 a

nd M

EX-IP

2 C

ards

)7

The LIU card includes a pushbutton that is used for configuration by the manufacturer.

Pressing this pushbutton will disrupt the system and necessitate excessive downtime

for the system. Do not press this pushbutton.

The LIU card is attached to the main control processor card with connectors CON 1

and CON 2. See Figure 7-1. CON 1 includes 12 pins and CON 3 includes four pins.

These connectors mate with corresponding connectors on the main control processor

card as follows (see Figure 7-6 and Figure 7-7):

On the MCP-IPx2, the LIU connector is attached close to the top panel of the

card.

On the MEX-IP2, the LIU connector can be attached to one of the following:

On the bottom side of the card, close to the front panel. This option is used

when the front panel RJ-45 port is connected.

On the bottom side of the panel, close to the cage backplane. This option is

available for IPx 800 and IPx 3000 systems where the LAN can be

connected from the rear panel of the cage. See Figure 7-4 and Figure 7-5.

Do not press the LIU card reset pushbutton. Doing so will disrupt the system and

necessitate excessive downtime for reconfiguration.

Control Card Installation Manual LAN Interface Unit (LIU) 7-3

Page 244: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Abou

t the

LIU

(Ins

talle

d on

MC

P-IP

x2 a

nd M

EX-IP

2 C

ards

)7

.................................................................................. Network Connections (RJ-45)

Connection to the LAN

The main control card contains an RJ-45 adapter for connection LIU to the LAN:

MCP-IPx2 on its top panel. See Figure 7-6.

MEX-IP2 on its front panel. See Figure 7-7.

Interface Connections

The following table shows the interface connections of the pins on the MAP RJ-45

connectors.

Table 7-2 LAN (LIU) Interface Connections (DTE)

Figure 7-2 LAN (LIU) RJ-45 Interface Connector PIN Assignment

The LIU is designed to operate over Ethernet LAN with a connection of less than 100

meters to the local switch or computer network when using Category 5 UTP

(unshielded twisted pair) in accordance with the 10/100Base-T protocol.

Routing the LAN Cables

The RJ-45 LAN cable is routed from the main control card as described in Connecting

the LAN/RS-232 Cables to MAP/CLA/LIU/KB0, page 1-25. Do one of the following:

Pin # Function

1 Tx(+)

2 Tx(-)

3 Rx(+)

4 not used

5 not used

6 Rx(-)

7 not used

8 not used

8

1

RJ-45

7-4 LAN Interface Unit (LIU) Control Card Installation Manual

Page 245: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Abou

t the

LIU

(Ins

talle

d on

MC

P-IP

x2 a

nd M

EX-IP

2 C

ards

)7

Coral FlexiCom 200, IPx 500, and CDRS 200, 200EFor LIU cards that have been attached to the MCP-IPx2 card, connect the RJ-45

connector from the top panel of the cage. See Figure 7-6.

Coral FlexiCom 300, 400V, 400For connection to Coral FlexiCom 300, 400V, 400 cabinets, the LIU is positioned

towards the front panel of the MEX-IP2 on the connectors marked LIU FRONT, thus

keeping the RJ-45 connectors at the front. See Figure 7-7.

Coral FlexiCom 5000Coral FlexiCom 5000 connects to the LAN/WAN via an LDF. See Figure 7-3. Refer

to Chapter 2 in the Coral FlexiCom 300, 400, 5000 installation manual. For

connection to Coral FlexiCom 5000 cabinets, the LIU is placed towards the front panel

of the MEX-IP2 on the connectors marked LIU FRONT. See Figure 7-7.

Figure 7-3 Coral FlexiCom 5000 Connector for LIU

LAN / WAN

H 624 CableCat. No. 72448000624

RJ-45 Crossover Cablefrom LDF to Front Panel

of MEX-IP2 Card

Pin #Pin 1 Tx(+)Pin 2 Tx(-)Pin 3 Rx(+)Pin 4 not usedPin 5 not usedPin 6 Rx(-)Pin 7 not usedPin 8 not used

LDFCat. No. 72449043100

Nomination

RJ-45RJ-45

RESET

MEX-IP2

LAN

SAU

KB0

Control Card Installation Manual LAN Interface Unit (LIU) 7-5

Page 246: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Abou

t the

LIU

(Ins

talle

d on

MC

P-IP

x2 a

nd M

EX-IP

2 C

ards

)7

Coral IPx 800M and 3000M

The IPx 800M and IPx 3000M cages include an RJ-45 adapter on the rear panel of the

cage marked LIU. See Figure 7-4 and Figure 7-5. This adapter is used as an alternative

connection to the RJ-45 LAN port on the front panel of the MEX-IP2 card. In order

for this rear port to be functional, the LIU card must be installed onto the MEX-IP2

card on the connectors marked LIU REAR. See Figure 7-7.

Figure 7-4 RJ-45 (LIU) Connector on Rear Panel of IPx 800M

Figure 7-5 RJ-45 (LIU) Connector on Rear Panel of IPx 3000M

LIU(RJ-45 LAN)

rear panelport

LIU(RJ-45 LAN)

rear panelport

7-6 LAN Interface Unit (LIU) Control Card Installation Manual

Page 247: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

C

7.2

ontrol Card Installation Manua

Installing the LIU Card

Inst

allin

g th

e LI

U C

ard

7

This section describes how to install and configure the LIU card.

The LIU card can be attached to the MCP-IPx2 and MEX-IP2 main control processor cards, only.

.................................................................................. Hardware Installation

Hardware installation includes the following stages:

1 Installing the LIU card onto the main control processor card

2 Connecting a the RJ-45 port to the LAN or to the workstation.

3 Configuring the DIP switches on the front panel of the main control processor

card.

Preparing for Installation

1 Locate a desk or table top that will support 20 lb (9.1 kg). If the surface can be

damaged by sharp objects, place a protective sheet of cardboard or similar

material over the top surface.

2 Place an anti-static sheet over the desk or table top. (The card's plastic

shipping bag will suffice.)

3 Connect the static dissipating wrist strap connector to the cage and put on the

strap. See Safety Guidelines, page 1-19.

l LAN Interface Unit (LIU) 7-7

Page 248: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Inst

allin

g th

e LI

U C

ard

7

4 Remove the main control card as described in one of the following:

Removing the MCP-IPx2 Card, page 2-17

Removing the MEX-IP2 Card, page 2-57

5 Place the main control card on the anti-static sheet.

LIU Card Assembly Kit

The LIU card is secured to the main processor control card by two threaded spacers.

The parts used to attach the spacers to the main control processor card are listed below.

The LIU card assembly kit includes additional parts. However, you only need to use

the parts listed below.

Table 7-3 Assembly Parts Used in DBM Assembly Kit

Installing the LIU Card

The LIU card is installed on the MCP-IPx2 and MEX-IP2 cards as described in

Figure 7-6 and Figure 7-7, respectively. To install the LIU card onto the main control

processor card:

1 Fasten the two hex M3X6 standoff spacers into the two holes.

Before removing the main control card from the Coral system, do the following:

1.Perform the Database Binary Backup procedure.

2.Verify that the database is not being backed up: check that the main control card

numeric status display does not read “P”. Data will be lost if power is removed from

the system when “P” is illuminated.

3.Turn the Coral power supply OFF. The flash card could be damaged if the main control

card is removed when the system is powered.

Part Quantity

Phillips screw M3X6 4

Curved spring washer 2

Female-female spacer hex M3X6 2

7-8 LAN Interface Unit (LIU) Control Card Installation Manual

Page 249: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Inst

allin

g th

e LI

U C

ard

7

2 For MCP-IPx2 cards, position the LIU card on top of the main control

processor card and align the two fastening holes on top of the standoff spacers.

See Figure 7-6.

3 For MEX-IP2 cards, position the LIU card on top of the main control

processor card and align the two fastening holes on top of the standoff spacers.

See Figure 7-7.

For Coral FlexiCom 300, 400, 5000 cabinets, install the LIU card towards

the front panel, thereby enabling the RJ-45 cables to be attached at the

front.

For Coral IPx 800, 3000 cabinets, install the LIU towards the rear panel,

thereby enabling the RJ-45 connectors to be attached from the rear.

4 Gently, but firmly press the LIU connectors onto the main control processor

card connector until the LIU card rests on the standoff spacers. A slight

resistance will be felt as the cards engage.

5 Insert the M3 lock washers over the two Phillips M3X6 screws and fasten the

LIU card to the main control processor card.

6 Set DIP switch #1 on the front panel of the control card to the left for LAN

connections, only.

If the LIU card is being attached to the MCP-IPx2 card, see Figure 7-6.

If the LIU card is being attached to the MEX-IP2 card, see Figure 7-7.

Control Card Installation Manual LAN Interface Unit (LIU) 7-9

Page 250: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Inst

allin

g th

e LI

U C

ard

7

Figure 7-6 LIU Card Assembled onto an MCP-IPx2 Card

DIP Switch #1set to left

MCP-IPx2

LIU connectors

LAN Connector

REMOVEBEFORE

USE

Holes for fasteningthe LIU card

7-10 LAN Interface Unit (LIU) Control Card Installation Manual

Page 251: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Inst

allin

g th

e LI

U C

ard

7

Figure 7-7 LIU Card Assembled onto an MEX-IP2 Card

RE

MO

VE

BE

FO

RE

US

E

RESET

MEX-IP2

LAN

SAU

KB0

DIPswitch #1set to left

Holes for fasteningLIU card

LIUconnectors

For front panelconnection

(all systems)

For rear panelconnection

(IPx 800 andIPx 3000systems)

LIUconnectors

LANconnector

Control Card Installation Manual LAN Interface Unit (LIU) 7-11

Page 252: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

NOTES:

Page 253: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

C

7.3

ontrol Card Installation Manua

Configuring the LIU Card

Con

figur

ing

the

LIU

Car

d 7

.................................................................................. Connecting the Coral to the Workstation

The RJ-45 LAN connector can be connected to the workstation either with a hub or a

crossover cable. See Figure 7-8.

1 Verify that the main control card has been inserted into the Coral system and is

operational. See Control Card Location in Coral System, page 1-21.

2 Do one of the following:

For connections made directly to the Coral, connect an RJ-45 crossover

cable between the Coral LIU connector and the workstation. See Figure 7-8

and Figure 7-9.

For connections made to the Coral via the LAN, attach an ordinary cable

between the Coral LIU connector and the workstation. See Figure 7-8.

3 Connect the other end of the cable to the workstation.

Figure 7-8 LIU Workstation Connection

Ethernet crossover cable

OrdinaryEthernetCable

OrdinaryEthernetCable

Coral System

Coral SystemLAN

l LAN Interface Unit (LIU) 7-13

Page 254: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

figur

ing

the

LIU

Car

d 7

.................................................................................. Configuring the LIU Card

This section describes how to configure the LIU card.

1 Before configuring the LIU, verify that:

The MAC address appears on the device label.

Your system administrator has provided the IP address parameters,

including the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.

DIP switch #1 on the front panel of the MCP-IPx2 or MEX IP2 control

card is turned to the left and the green LED above it is continuously ON.

Failure to turn DIP switch #1 to the left and verify that the green LED is continuously ON will result in no communication via the LAN.

The main control card is installed and functioning as described in MCP-IPx2

Status Display Codes, page 2-9.

2 Connect to the LIU using one of the following:

Two ordinary Ethernet cables: The first cable is connected between the

workstation and the LAN. The second cable is connected between the LAN

and the Coral LIU connector. See Figure 7-8.

One Ethernet crossover cable connected between the computer LAN

interface and the Coral LAN interface. See Figure 7-8. This option is

applicable for situations where the workstation connects directly to the LIU

port. Generally, the LIU port connects to a remote workstation via the LAN,

and a cross-over cable is not necessary. Both the Coral system and the

workstation are considered to be servers. Therefore, the cable

interconnecting them must be a cross-over cable. See Figure 7-9.

Figure 7-9 Cross-over Cable with RJ-45 Connectors

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

RJ-45RJ-45

7-14 LAN Interface Unit (LIU) Control Card Installation Manual

Page 255: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

figur

ing

the

LIU

Car

d 7

3 Set the baud rate as follows: the baud rate is set during first initialization at

9600 bps, No parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, VT-100. The baud rate can be set

from 300 bps to 115,200 bps. Refer to the Program Interface Reference

Manual (Chapter-17 Terminal Setup - Route: TERM,0) for instructions on the

database programming required.

4 Verify that the computer has a valid IP address. Do one of the following:

Assign an IP address from DHCP. See Assigning an IP Address, page 7-15.

Assign a static IP address. See Appendix: Assigning a Static IP Address,

page 7-26. If a crossover cable is connected between the workstation and the

Coral, assign a static IP address to the workstation.

.................................................................................. Assigning an IP Address

The IP address can be assigned from the DHCP server or statically. To assign a static

IP address, see Appendix: Assigning a Static IP Address, page 7-26.

The displayed output on the following pages constitutes examples from a specific LIU software version. Output might differ on your screen.

1 In the command prompt, type ipconfig to display the computer IP parameters,

including the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.

2 Add a static ARP entry to the computer ARP table as follows: in the command

prompt, type arp –s [your IP-address] [your MAC-address], and press Enter.

The IP address format is as follows: xxx.yyy.zzz.www.The MAC address format is as follows: 00-20-4a-aa-bb-cc.

Control Card Installation Manual LAN Interface Unit (LIU) 7-15

Page 256: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

figur

ing

the

LIU

Car

d 7

3 Verify the Static ARP entry by typing arp –a and pressing Enter. The IP

address and the MAC address (physical address) should be listed as static

entries. Verify that these addresses are correct.

4 Assign the IP-Address temporarily to the device as follows:Telnet the device to port 1 by typing telnet IP-address 1. After a few seconds,

the connection will fail, and the computer will generate an error message.

However, the device will store the IP-address temporarily.

7-16 LAN Interface Unit (LIU) Control Card Installation Manual

Page 257: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

figur

ing

the

LIU

Car

d 7

5 Assign a permanent IP address to the device, as follows:

a Telnet the device to port 9999 by typing telnet IP-address 9999.

b When the device initial prompt appears, press Enter to get the device main

menu.

Control Card Installation Manual LAN Interface Unit (LIU) 7-17

Page 258: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

figur

ing

the

LIU

Car

d 7

c From the main menu, select 0, and type the permanent IP address that you

want to assign to the device.

It is possible to configure the device to obtain a dynamic IP address from the DHCP server by typing 0.0.0.0 in the IP address field.

7-18 LAN Interface Unit (LIU) Control Card Installation Manual

Page 259: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

figur

ing

the

LIU

Car

d 7

d In the Set Gateway IP addr field, type Y and then type the gateway IP

address. For the Number of Bits in the Host Part field of the subnet mask,

type the number of bits in the host part, and press Enter. See Table 7-4.

Control Card Installation Manual LAN Interface Unit (LIU) 7-19

Page 260: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

figur

ing

the

LIU

Car

d 7

Table 7-4 Number of Bits per Host Part

6 Set the serial port parameters as follows:

a Configure the Port No to be 11001. On this port, the device listens for terminal connection (port 9999 used for configuration).

b Verify that the DisConnTime parameter is equal to 0 to prevent

disconnection on idle.

c Do not change the default.

7 Save the settings by typing 9 (from main menu).

Subnet Number of bits in host part

Subnet Number of bits in host part

Subnet Number of bits in host part

255.255.255.248 3 255.255.255.128 7 255.255.248.0 11255.255.255.240 4 255.255.255.0 8 255.255.240.0 12255.255.255.224 5 255.255.254.0 9 255.255.224.0 13255.255.255.192 6 255.255.252.0 10 255.255.192.0 14

7-20 LAN Interface Unit (LIU) Control Card Installation Manual

Page 261: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

figur

ing

the

LIU

Car

d 7

Control Card Installation Manual LAN Interface Unit (LIU) 7-21

Page 262: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

figur

ing

the

LIU

Car

d 7

.................................................................................. Configuring the LIU Device

After setting the permanent IP Address, it is possible to complete device configuration

using a web browser. In particular, it is convenient to set serial port parameters using

the web interface.

Running the web interface requires Java. J2SE Java Runtime Environment (JRE) version 1.4.2_04 or higher should be downloaded from http://java.sun.com.

1 Open a web browser and type the permanent IP address of the device in the

address bar.

2 The Unit Configuration main window is used to monitor system parameters. It

is not possible to configure parameters from this screen.

7-22 LAN Interface Unit (LIU) Control Card Installation Manual

Page 263: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

figur

ing

the

LIU

Car

d 7

3 The Server Properties window enables you to set the device IP parameters.

Control Card Installation Manual LAN Interface Unit (LIU) 7-23

Page 264: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

figur

ing

the

LIU

Car

d 7

4 The Port Properties window enables you to set device IP parameters. Pressing

the Channels1 and Channels2 buttons enables you to switch between device

channels. Clicking the Factory Settings1 or Factory Settings2 buttons

enables you to set Channel1 or Channel2 back to the original factory settings.

d Save the configuration in the device memory as currently displayed by

clicking the Update Settings button.

7-24 LAN Interface Unit (LIU) Control Card Installation Manual

Page 265: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

figur

ing

the

LIU

Car

d 7

.................................................................................. Activating the LIU Application

The LIU application enables the PI to be viewed from a remote location via the LAN

network. To view the PI via the LAN network:, do the following:

1 Type Telnet [Device self IP-address Port no] in the command prompt.

2 Set the serial port parameters as follows: configure the Port No to be 11001.

On this port, the device listens for terminal connection (port 9999 used for

configuration).

Control Card Installation Manual LAN Interface Unit (LIU) 7-25

Page 266: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

figur

ing

the

LIU

Car

d 7

.................................................................................. Appendix: Assigning a Static IP Address

Set the static IP address of the computer as follows:

1 In the Control Panel window, click the Network and Dial-up Connections

icon. The Network and Dial-up Connections window opens.

2 Right-click the Local Area Connection icon and select Properties. The Local

Area Connection Properties dialog box opens.

3 Select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) check box and click the Properties

button. The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box opens.

7-26 LAN Interface Unit (LIU) Control Card Installation Manual

Page 267: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

Con

figur

ing

the

LIU

Car

d 7

4 Set the IP Address as follows:

Click the Use the following IP address: radio button.

Type the IP address and subnet mask of your computer in the IP address:

and the Subnet mask: fields, respectively. The Default gateway: field is

not required.

5 Click OK. The IP address is set.

Control Card Installation Manual LAN Interface Unit (LIU) 7-27

Page 268: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

NOTES:

Page 269: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

C

7.4

ontrol Card Installation Manua

Specifications - LIU

Spec

ifica

tions

- LI

U

7

Network Interface....................................... RJ-45 10Base-T

Coral Common Control (Mother Board): .. MEX-IP2, MCP-IPx2

Settings

Baud rate .................................................... 300 - 115,200 bps

Parity .......................................................... None, Odd, Even

Number of bits............................................ 7, 8

Stop bit ....................................................... 1

Default........................................................ 9,600 bps, No parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, VT-100

l LAN Interface Unit (LIU) 7-29

Page 270: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document

NOTES:

Page 271: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document
Page 272: Coral Control Cards - Microsoft · Coral Control Cards for CDRS 200 IPx 500,800,3000 and FlexiCom 200,300,400V,400,5000 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Document